Carel 2750441 Small Rack Control PRK300S3Fk User Manual

pRack pR300
compressor rack controller
User manual
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
H i g h
E f f i c i e n c y
S o l u t i o n s
ENG
IMPORTANT
DISPOSAL
CAREL bases the development of its products on decades of experience in
HVAC, on the continuous investments in technological innovations to products,
procedures and strict quality processes with in-circuit and functional testing on
100% of its products, and on the most innovative production technology available
on the market. CAREL and its subsidiaries nonetheless cannot guarantee that all
the aspects of the product and the software included with the product respond
to the requirements of the final application, despite the product being developed
according to start-of-the-art techniques.
The customer (manufacturer, developer or installer of the final equipment) accepts
all liability and risk relating to the configuration of the product in order to reach the
expected results in relation to the specific final installation and/or equipment.
CAREL may, based on specific agreements, act as a consultant for the positive
commissioning of the final unit/application, however in no case does it accept
liability for the correct operation of the final equipment/system.
Fig. 1
Fig.2
Please read and keep.
With reference to European Union directive 2012/19/EU issued on 4 July 2012 and
related national legislation, please note that:
1. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) cannot be disposed of as
municipal waste but must be collected separately so as to allow subsequent
recycling, treatment or disposal, as required by law;
2. users are required to take Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) at end-oflife, complete with all essential components, to the WEEE collection centres
identified by local authorities. The directive also provides for the possibility to
return the equipment to the distributor or retailer at end-of-life if purchasing
equivalent new equipment, on a one-to-one basis, or one-to-zero for
equipment less than 25 cm on their longest side;
3. this equipment may contain hazardous substances: improper use or incorrect
disposal of such may have negative effects on human health and on the
environment;
4. the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin – Fig.1) even if, shown on the product or
on the packaging, indicates that the equipment must be disposed of separately
at end-of-life;
5. if at end-of-life the EEE contains a battery (Fig. 2), this must be removed
following the instructions provided in the user manual before disposing of
the equipment. Used batteries must be taken to appropriate waste collection
centres as required by local regulations;
6. in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties
are specified by local waste disposal legislation.
The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is specified in the
technical documentation supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even
prior to purchase, from the website www.CAREL.com.
Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced level of technology, requires setup
/ configuration / programming / commissioning to be able to operate in the best
possible way for the specific application. The failure to complete such operations,
which are required/indicated in the user manual, may cause the final product to
malfunction; CAREL accepts no liability in such cases.
Only qualified personnel may install or carry out technical service on the product.
The customer must only use the product in the manner described in the
documentation relating to the product.
In addition to observing any further warnings described in this manual, the following
warnings must be heeded for all CAREL products:
• Prevent the electronic circuits from getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of
liquids or condensate contain corrosive minerals that may damage the electronic
circuits. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments that
comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the manual.
• Do not install the device in particularly hot environments. Too high temperatures
may reduce the life of electronic devices, damage them and deform or melt the
plastic parts. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments
that comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the manual.
• Do not attempt to open the device in any way other than described in the manual.
• Do not drop, hit or shake the device, as the internal circuits and mechanisms may
be irreparably damaged.
• Do not use corrosive chemicals, solvents or aggressive detergents to clean the
device.
• Do not use the product for applications other than those specified in the technical
manual.
Warranty on the materials: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding
consumables).
Approval: the quality and safety of CAREL INDUSTRIES Hqs products are guaranteed
by the ISO 9001 certified design and production system.
WARNING: separate as much as possible the probe and digital input signal cables
from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables to avoid possible
electromagnetic disturbance.
Never run power cables (including the electrical panel wiring) and signal cables in
the same conduits.
All of the above suggestions likewise apply to the controllers, serial boards,
programming keys or any other accessory in the CAREL product portfolio.
CAREL adopts a policy of continual development. Consequently, CAREL reserves
the right to make changes and improvements to any product described in this
document without prior warning.
NO POWER
& SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
The technical specifications shown in the manual may be changed without prior
warning.
The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is specified in the CAREL general
contract conditions, available on the website www.CAREL.com and/or by specific
agreements with customers; specifically, to the extent where allowed by applicable
legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any lost
earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement goods or
services, damage to things or people, downtime or any direct, indirect, incidental,
actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential damage of any kind whatsoever,
whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or any other liabilities
deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the product, even if CAREL
or its subsidiaries are warned of the possibility of such damage.
Key icone
NOTE:
IMPORTANT:
TUTORIAL:
3
to bring attention to a very important subject; in
particular, regarding the practical use of the various
functions of the product.
to bring critical issues regarding the use of the pRack
pR300 to the attention of the user.
some simple examples to accompany the user in
configuring the most common settings.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
4
ENG
Content
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
1.2
1.3
Main features ............................................................................................................................7
Components and accessories ........................................................................................7
Configuration of the system and configuration of the inputs ....................
and outputs ...............................................................................................................................8
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
27
Starting the first time ........................................................................................................ 27
5. USER INTERFACE
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
22
General installation instructions ................................................................................ 22
Power supply ......................................................................................................................... 22
Universal inputs/outputs................................................................................................ 22
Connecting the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 24
Connecting the analogue outputs .......................................................................... 25
Connecting the digital outputs.................................................................................. 25
pLAN electrical connections ........................................................................................ 26
4. START UP
4.1
9
pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board description ......................................................................9
Technical specifications ................................................................................................. 11
pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board dimensions.......................................................... 16
pRack pR300 general connection diagram ........................................................ 17
3. INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
7
29
Graphic terminal .................................................................................................................. 29
Description of the display .............................................................................................. 29
Password ................................................................................................................................... 30
Description menu ............................................................................................................... 30
FUNCTIONS
32
Unit On-Off.............................................................................................................................. 32
Control ....................................................................................................................................... 32
Compressors........................................................................................................................... 35
Fans .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Energy saving ........................................................................................................................ 43
Accessory functions........................................................................................................... 44
Settings...................................................................................................................................... 49
Managing the default values ....................................................................................... 50
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
51
8. ALARMS
73
8.1
8.2
8.3
Alarm management .......................................................................................................... 73
Compressor alarms ............................................................................................................ 73
Pressure and prevent alarms ........................................................................................ 74
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
9.1
76
9.2
76
PlantVisor PRO, PlantWatch PRO, Boss and Boss-mini supervisory systems
Commissioning software ............................................................................................... 76
10. UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
77
10.1 Update via pRack Manager /RHEC Manager ..................................................... 77
10.2 Updating using SmartKey.............................................................................................. 77
10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions ............................................................................... 77
10.4 Configuring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a system screen ................................ 80
10.5 Saving parameters between different software versions .......................... 81
11. APPENDIX
82
5
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
6
ENG
1. INTRODUCTION
For each size the following versions are available:
• with built-in terminal, without terminal
1.1 Main features
pRack pR300 is the evolution of the pR100 electronic controller. The
consolidated software for management of compressor racks is combined
with new functions, on a totally upgraded hardware platform. Below are
the main functions (new and consolidated) and compressor management
features on pRack pR300.
1.1.1
All pRack pR300 models are equipped with:
• integrated RS485 serial interface
• anthracite gray plastic cover
• connector kit
• USB.
pR300 functionality list
pRack pR300 models
Direct management via Fieldbus, using either the built-in driver
(PRK300D*) or external driver, of one or two valves for the operation of heat exchangers typically used in subcritical systems (CO2)
Code
Description
PRK300S0F0 pRack pR300 small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit,
PRK300S0E0 pRack pR300 small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit,
PRK300M0F0 pRack pR300 medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector
kit,
PRK300M0E0 pRack pR300 medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit,
PRK300D0F0 pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB, no
display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit,
PRK300D0E0 pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB, no
display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit,
PRK300L0F0 pRack pR300 large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
PRK300L0E0 pRack pR300 large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 6 SSR, connector kit,
PRK300S3F0 pRack pR300 small, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, connector
kit,
PRK300S3E0 pRack pR300 small, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit,
PRK300M3F0 pRack pR300 medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit,
PRK300M3E0 pRack pR300 medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit
PRK300D3F0 pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. exv, USB,
display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
PRK300D3E0 pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. exv, USB,
display built-in, bms/fbus opto, 2 SSR, connector kit
PRK300L3F0 pRack pR300 large, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, connector
kit
PRK300L3E0 pRack pR300 large, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 6 ssr,
connector kit
PRK300S3FK pRack pR300 small, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
PRK300M3FK pRack pR300 medium, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
PRK300D3FK pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB,
external display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
PRK300L3FK pRack pR300 large, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
Up to 2 suction line and 2 condensing line
Scroll, reciprocating, digital scroll and screw compressors management
Up to 12 scroll compressors, reciprocating for line
Main features Up to 2 screw compressors for line 1, maximum one screw compressors line
Fino a 2 compressori Bitzer CRII (massimo 1 per linea)
Up to 16 fans for line
Inverter for suctione and condensing line
Generic functions easily configurable (ON/OFF, modulations, alarms, scheduler)
Heat recovery
S, M, D, L version (based on pRack hardware)
Hardware
External display (pGDE) or built-in display
Up to 12 piston compressors per line, a maximum of 4 different sizes
Up to 4 alarms per compressor
Compressors Inverter management, even with modulation inside the dead zone
Pump down
Control of overheating in suction
Languages
Italian, English, German, French, Spanish, Russian, Portoguese, Swedish
Temperature: °C, °F
Unit of
Pressure: barg, psig (all pressure values are also converted to
measure
temperature)
Date format settable between: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy, yy.mm.dd
Proportional band (P, PI) available for compressors and fans
Control
Neutral zone available for compressors and fans
FIFO
Compressor
LIFO
rotation
Timed
Fixed (the ON/OFF order can be set as required)
Scheduling available: heating/cooling, 4 daily time bands, 5 special
periods (e.g.: closing period), 10 special days (e.g.: holidays)
Scheduling by
Schedulable functions: set point compensation for compressors
calendar
and fans, split condenser (heating/cooling only), anti noise, heat
recovery, generic functions
Compensation from digital input, from scheduling, floating based
Setpoint
on supervisor parameter (compressors) or outside temperature
(fans)
Prevent
High pressure, including activation of heat recovery or ChillBooster
Automatic and manual management
Configurable compressor alarms
Alarms
Double Signal on digital outputs for high or low priority alarms
Log from application
Supervisor
Carel
protocol
Modbusâ
Tab. 1.c
Accessories:
Tab. 1.a
The pRack pR300 is available in 4 hardware sizes listed in the table (for the
detailed description of each size, electrical characteristics and installation,
refer to Chapter 2):
Hardware sizes:
Small
Medium
Medium + Driver
Large
Available ana- Available
log inputs digital inputs
5
8
8
10
8
14
14
18
Available
analog
outputs
4
4
4
6
Description
PGDERK0FX0
CONVONOFF0
pGD evolution user terminal for pRack pR300T
Module to convert a
0...10 V analog output to an SPDT digital output
RS485 serial connection board
USB/RS485 serial convertor with telephone connector
USB/RS485 serial converter with 3-way terminal
Smart Key programming key
Connection cable for terminal 1=0.8m
Connection cable for terminal 1=1.5m
Connection cable for terminal 1=3 m
Ratiometric pressure probes 0…5 Vdc
PCOS004850
CVSTDUTLF0
CVSTDUMOR0
PCOSO0AKY0
S90CONN002
S90CONN000
S90CONN001
SPKT*R* and
SPKC00*
SPK*C*, SPK1*,
SPK2*, SPK3*
NTC*
NTC*HT*
EVD0000E50
EVDIS00D*0
E2VCABS*00
1.2 Components and accessories
Size
Code
Available
digital
outputs
8
13
13
18
Active pressure probes 4…20 mA
Pressure probe NTC -50T90°C
Pressure probe NTC -0T150°C
EVD EVO universal driver for Carel valves, RS485/ModbusTM
Display for EVD EVO
EVD-valve connection cable
Tab. 1.d
Tab. 1.b
7
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Example 4: 2 suction lines on board (scroll or piston compressors), 2 high
pressure lines on the board):
1.3 Configuration of the system and
configuration of the inputs and outputs
pRack pR300 has the same system, input and output configuration
management as the standard pRack pR100. It is available 22 configurations,
but it is more ultilised those described in Appendix A.1.
I/O
Note: each input/output is completely configurable with the only
requirements being those set by the system configuration. For
example, the suction pressure probe on line 1 can be arbitrarily configured
to any one of the analog inputs in the pLAN control board with address 1
compatible with the type of probe.
I/O
pR300
Refer Cap. 4, to have more ionformation about selection of configuration
system and pre-configuration and see Appendix A.1.
I/O
I/O
System configurations available
pRack pR300 can manage system configurations with up to 2 suction lines
(maximum 12 scroll or piston compressors for lines 1 and 2, maximum 2
screw compressors for line 1 and maximum 1 BitzerCRII compressor per
line), up to 2 condenser lines (maximum 16 fans per line). When there
are two suction lines, the 2 lines can be managed by the same pRack
board or by separate boards. The condenser lines can be managed by
the board controls the suction lines or by separate boards, depending on
the number of inputs/outputs available. For each suction and condenser
line, pRack pR300 can manage a modulating device (inverter, Digital
Scroll® compressor, compressor with continuous control or BitzerCRII
compressor). pRack pR300 manages up to 1 line with screw compressors,
and the board can control up to 2 compressors.
Fig. 1.c
Example 4: 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors),
2 high pressure lines (on the first suction line board):
I/O
I/O
2
Example 1: 1 suction line with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high pressure
line:
C8
C7
C7
C4
3
2
NC8
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
J1
ID5
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J15
J14
4
B M S c ard
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
J2
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
NO1
C8
C7
C7
3
NC8
C4
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
J13
J10
Some examples of managed system configurations are described below,
while for the complete list of configurations and its features refer to
Appendix A1.
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
pLAN
+Vterm
1.3.1
I/O
I/O
Fig. 1.d
4
3
2
C8
C7
Example 5: 2 suction lines on separate boards with scroll or piston
compressors, 2 high pressure line on separate boar
NC8
C7
C4
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
J14
J13
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
I/O
pLAN
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
3
2
C8
NC8
NO8
C7
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
J15
1
J26 FBus2
ID7
ID8
IDC1
C8
NC8
ID6
NO8
ID4
ID2
C4
ID3
ID1
NO6
Y2
C4
Y4
Y1
C1
Y3
VG0
NO3
NO5
VG
J5
NO2
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
+5 VREF
B M S c ard
J4
J3
GND
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
IDC1
+Vterm
ID8
C8
NC8
J24
GND
ID7
NO8
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J1
ID5
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
NO3
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
G
+Vterm
GND
J2
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pR300
J1
NO1
C1
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
J15
1
J26 FBus2
U3
pLAN
NO7
J14
J13
J10
I/O
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
ID1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
I/O
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
NO1
J11 pLAN
NO5
C1
J12
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
Fig. 1.a
J11 pLAN
4
3
2
J12
J11 pLAN
C7
NO7
C7
2
1
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
+5 VREF
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
B M S c ar d
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
GND
+Vterm
G
I/O
J2
3
J26 FBus2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO4
4
J25 BMS2
J15
J14
J13
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO1
C1
J15
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pLAN
Example 2: 2 suction lines on the same board with scroll or piston
compressors, 1 high pressure line:
I/O
I/O
Fig. 1.e
pR300
I/O
Note: if connecting more than one pRack pR300 board in a pLAN,
mixed networks cannot be created combining Compact boards and S, M,
L boards, while mixed networks are possible using combinations of the
latter models only.
I/O
Important: all the boards connected to the pLAN must have the
same software revision.
Fig. 1.b
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
8
ENG
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION
2.1 pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board description
pRack pR300 S
14
C8
J15
J14
J13
J10
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
16
17
3
2
NC8
ID8
NO11
C7
NO8
ID7
NO10
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
NO4
C1
C1
NO3
15
NO2
13
12
11
NO1
10
1
18
pR300
1
3
5
IDC1
8
7
6
ID6
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
+VDC
U4
3
4
J5
J4
J3
GND
U3
U1
2
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G
G0
+Vterm
J1
B M S ca r d
ID5
Fi eld Bus car d
Fig. 2.a
pRack pR300 M
J10
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
16
17
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
C8
C9
J17
J16
J15
J14
J13
NC8
NO8
C7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
NO9
15
14
C1
13
NO2
12
11
NO1
10
J18
1
18
pR300
1
2
3
B M S card
3
5
6
7
8
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID10
GND
3
ID9
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
8
ID11
J7
J6
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
J5
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus car d
9
Fig. 2.b
Legende:
Rif.
1
Description
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Rif.
11
Description
pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
Tab. 2.a
9
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
pRack pR300 D
14
J26FBus2
16
17
2
1
4
24
3
ID13
IDC13
ID14H
S2
S3
ID13H
DI2
S1
IDC9
DI1
VREF
ID12
ID9
GND
J7
S4
GND
ID11
G
G0
8
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
J6
ID14
J29
ID10
VBAT
7
6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
5
3
C13
23
C D
A B
J5
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
3
NO13
21
J30
B M S car d
J3
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J24
2
20
18
22
J1
3
J28
4
1
J27
pR300
Field Bus car d
NC13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
NO9
C8
1
2
2
J18
J17
4
3
1
4
J25 BMS2
3
J10
J16
J15
J14
J13
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
C1
15
NO3
13
12
NO2
11
NO1
10
J8
9
8
Fig. 2.c
Legende:
Ref.
1
Description
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
11
pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Ref.
13
Description
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
16
17
Relay digital outputs
BMS2 connector
FieldBus2 connector
18
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
20
21
22
23
24
Electronic valve A connector
Electronic valve B connector
Connector for external Ultracap module (accessory)
Valve driver analogue and digital inputs
Valve status signal LED
Tab. 2.b
N.C. Model
J18
C16
NO17
NO18
C16
NO16
C13
NC12
NO13
C12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
NO9
C9
C8
NO8
NC8
C15
1
NC15
2
J26 FBus2
J17
J16
NO15
3
C14
4
J15
NC14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
J14
J13
NO14
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
C1
NO2
NO1
J22
NC13
15
C16
14
NC18
13
12
NC17
11
C16
10
NC16
pRack pR300 L
J21
J22
J23 FBus2
15
15
19
17
18
9
3
7
N.O. Model
16
8
pR300
1
2
3
3
6
8
3
U10
GND
ID17
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC17
GND
ID13
ID18
U9
ID13H
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
J6
U7
IDC1
U6
ID8
ID7
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y6
Y5
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
7
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
5
J20
J5
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
J19
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus c ard
8
J8
9
Fig. 2.a
Legende:
Ref. Description
1
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Ref.
11
Description
pLAN plug-in connector
12, 13, 14
Reserved
15
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
19
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
FieldBus2 connector
Tab. 2.c
10
ENG
2.2 Technical specifications
2.2.1
Physical specifications
Dimensions
Plastic case
Built-in terminal
SMALL
MEDIUM, LARGE,
BUILT-IN DRIVER
Assembly
Material
Flammability
Ball pressure test
Resistance to creeping current
Colour
PGD1 (132x64 pixel) with backlit keypad
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Ingress protection
Environmental pollution
Other features
Class according to protection against electric shock
PTI of the insulating materials
Period of stress across the insulating parts
Type of action
Type of disconnection or microswitching
Heat and fire resistance category
Ageing characteristics (operating hours)
Number of automatic operating cycles
Overvoltage category
13 DIN modules 110 x 227,5 x 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 x 315 x 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 x 315 x 75 mm
fitted on DIN rail in accordance with DIN 43880 CEI EN 50022
technopolymer
V2 (UL94) and 850 °C (in accordance with IEC 60695)
125 °C
≥ 250 V
White RAL 9016
PRK300*3**, PRK300*0**(w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing(*)
PRK300*3*0 (with built-in terminal): -20T60 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
(*) with Ultracap module fitted: -40T60°C
PRK300D*** (w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
PRK300D*** (with built-in terminal): -30T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing
Models with USB port and/or with Ultracap module: IP20 on the front panel only
Models without USB port and without Ultracap module: IP40 on the front panel only
2
to be integrated into Class I and/or II appliances in the versions without valve driver,
class I in the versions with valve driver
PCB: PTI 250 V; insulating material: PTI 175
long
1C; 1Y for SSR versions
microswitching
Category D (UL94-V2)
80,000
100,000 (EN 60730-1); 30,000 (UL 873)
category II
Tab. 2.d
2.2.2
Electrical specifications
Power supply
SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE: use a dedicated 50 class II safety transformer VA.
BUILT IN DRIVER: use a dedicated 100 VA class II safety transformer.
Vac
P (Vac)
SMALL
24 Vac (+10/-15%), 45 VA
MEDIUM
50/60 Hz protected
LARGE
by an external 2.5 A
(EXTRALARGE)
type T fuse
Vdc
P (Vdc)
28 to 36 Vdc
30 W
(-20/+10%) protected
by an external 2.5 A
type T fuse
BUILT-IN DRIVER
90 VA
(DRIVER VALVE INTEGRATED)
Important: only power “PRK300TD***” with alternating current. The power transformer secondary must be earthed.
Not allowed
Terminal block
with male/female plug-in connectors
Cable cross-section
min 0.5 mm2 - max 2.5 mm2
CPU
32 bit, 100 MHz
Non-volatile memory (FLASH)
2 M byte Bios + 11 Mbyte application program
Data memory (RAM)
3.2 Mbyte (1.76 Mbyte Bios + 1.44 Mbyte application program)
T buffer memory (EEPROM)
13 kbyte
P parameter memory(EEPROM) 32 kbyte (not available to the pLAN)
Clock with battery
standard, precision 100 ppm
Battery
CR2430 3 Vdc lithium button battery (size 24x3 mm)
Software class and structure
Class A
Category of immunity to voltage Category III
surges (EN 61000-4-5)
Device not designed to be hand-held when powered
Tab. 2.e
11
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Universal inputs/outputs U...
4
- 0 to 5 V signals from ratiometric probes powered by controller
Input precision: ± 0.3 % f.s.
Time constant for each input: 0.5 s
Classification of measuring circuits (CEI EN 61010-1): category I
Digital inputs w/o optical isolation,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
max tot 4
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs from probes powered by the
controller
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs powered externally
5
5
4
6
8
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
7
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
6
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
max 2 4
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8)
- voltage-free contacts
- fast digital inputs
type: voltage-free contact
max current: 10 mA
max frequency 2kHz and resolution ±1 Hz
max tot 10
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals powered externally
5
max tot 9
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals from probes powered by controller
max tot 8
- CAREL NTC probes (-50T90°C; R/T 10 kΩ±1% at 25°C);
- HT NTC (0T150°C); - PTC (600Ω to 2200Ω)
- PT500 (-100T400°C) - PT1000 (-100T400°C)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
LARGE
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
10
max tot 7
Analogue inputs,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
max tot 5
2.2.3
6
10
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
9
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
6
LARGE
10
6
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
Important:
• for active probes powered externally (0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA ), to avoid irreparably damaging the controller, implement adequate current
protection measures that must ensure < 100 mA;
• the ratiometric probes can only be powered by the controller;
• on power-up, the universal inputs/outputs remain shorted to GND for around 500 ms until the end of the configuration procedure.
Analogue outputs w/o optical isolation
(maximum number), Lmax = 30 m
0 to 10 Vdc (maximum current 2 mA)
PWM (output 0/3.3 Vdc, maximum current 2 mA, frequency: 2kHz
asynchronous)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
LARGE
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
10
5
8
10
Tab. 2.f
2.2.4
Power supply to probes and terminals
can be used to power any active probes using the 24/21 Vdc ± 10% (P+5*/P+3*) available at terminal +VDC (J2). The maximum current available is
150 mA, protected against short-circuits.
+5Vref
to power the 0 to 5V ratiometric probes, use the 5 Vdc (± 5%) available at terminal +5VREF(J24). The maximum current available is 60 mA.
P+3**********: 21 Vdc ± 10%; P+5**********: 24 Vdc ± 10%
Vterm
Used to power an external terminal as an alternative to the one connected to J10, Pmax = 1.5 W
Important: if the length exceeds 10 m, use shielded cable with the shield connected to earth. In any case, the max length allowed is 30 m.
+Vdc
Tab. 2.g
2.2.5
Digital inputs ID... IDH...
Type
Lmax
Optically-isolated
30 m
Minimum digital input pulse
detection time
SMALL
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
LARGE
Normally open (open-closed-open)
Normally closed (closed-open-closed)
Power supply to the inputs
External
Maximum number
Classification of measuring
Category I: 24 Vac/Vdc (J5, J7, J20)
circuits (CEI EN 61010-1)
Category III: 230 Vac (J8, J19)
Digital input current draw at 24 Vac/Vdc
Digital input current draw at 230 Vac
no. of optically-isolated no. of optically-isolated inputs, 24 Vac/Vdc or 230 Vac
inputs, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc - 50/60 Hz
8
None
12
2
14
4
200 ms
400 ms
IDH...: 230 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz
ID...: 24 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz o 28 to 36 Vdc (+10/-20%)
5 mA
5 mA
Tab. 2.h
Note:
• separate as much as possible the probe and digital input cables from cables to inductive loads and power cables, so as to avoid possible electromagnetic
disturbance. Never run power cables (including the electrical panel cables) and signal cables in the same conduits;
• the two 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc inputs on terminals J8 (ID13, ID14) or J19 (ID15, ID16) have the same common pole and therefore both will operate at 230 Vac
or 24 Vac/Vdc. There is basic insulation between the two inputs; there is reinforced insulation between the inputs and the rest of the controller;
• ID1...ID8, ID9 to ID12, ID17, ID18 have functional insulation from the rest of the controller;
• for DC voltage inputs (24 Vdc) either the + or the - can be connected to common terminal;
• the rating of the external contact connected to the digital inputs must be at least 5 mA.
2.2.6
Analogue outputs Y...
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
12
ENG
Type
Lmax
Maximum number
Power supply
Precision
Resolution
Settling time
Maximum load
0 to 10 V optically-isolated on Y1...Y6
30 m
SMALL, MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
LARGE
external
Y1...Y6
8 bit
Y1...Y6
1 kΩ (10 mA)
4
Y1...Y4, 0 to 10 V
6
Y1...Y6, 0 to 10 V
24 Vac (+10/-15%) or 28 to 36 Vdc on VG(+), VG0(-)
± 2% full scale
from 1 s (slew rate 10 V/s) to 20 s (slew rate 0.5 V/s) selectable via SW
Tab. 2.i
Warnings:
• for lengths > 10 m, only use shielded cable, with the shield connected to earth;
• a 0 to 10 Vdc analogue output can be connected in parallel to other outputs of the same type, or alternatively to an external source of voltage. The higher
voltage will be considered. Correct operation is not guaranteed if actuators with voltage inputs are connected;
• power the VG-VG0 analogue outputs at the same voltage on G-G0: Connect G0 to VG0 and G to VG. This is valid for both alternating and direct current
power supplies.
2.2.7
Digital outputs NO..., NC...
Type
Maximum no
Relay. Minimum contact current: 50 mA.
8: SMALL; 13: MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER; 18: LARGE;
The relay outputs have different features depending on the model of controller. The outputs can be divided into groups. The relays belonging
to the same group (individual cell in the table) have basic insulation and therefore must have the same voltage. Between groups (cells in the
Insulation distance
table) there is double insulation and consequently these may have different voltages. There is also double insulation between each terminal of
the digital outputs and the rest of the controller.
Relays with the same insulation
Makeup of the
groups
Number of
changeover
contacts
Model
1
SMALL
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NO
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NC
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
1: SMALL (relay 8)
3: MEDIUM (relay 8, 12, 13)
5: LARGE NO/NC (relay 8, 12, 13, 14 e 15)
2
3
4
5
Group
6
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
9...11
Type A
9...11
Type A
9...11
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
7
13
Type A
13
Type A
13
Type A
8
14...15
Type A
14...15
Type A
9
16...18
Type A
16...18
Type C
10
-
11
-
Note: the output relays have different features, depending on the model of controller.
Rated data
Relay type A
Approval
Relay rated data
Switchable power Relay type B
Approval
Relay rated data
Relay type C
Approval
SPDT, 2000 VA, 250 Vac, 8A resistive
UL 873
2 A 250 Vac resistive, 2A FLA, 12 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
2 A resistive, 2A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 2(2)A (100,000 cycles)
SPST, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
SPDT, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
Tab. 2.a
2.2.8
SSR outputs (in models where featured)
Maximum number
Working voltage
Load current (MAX)
Impulsive load current (MAX)
2: SMALL (ouputs 7, 8); 2: MEDIUM (ouputs 7, 12); 6: LARGE (ouputs 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15)
24 Vac/Vdc
1A
1.2 A
Tab. 2.j
Warnings:
• if the load requires higher current, use an external SSR;
• to power external resistive loads via SSRs, use the same power supply as the pRack (supplied to terminals G-G0), which must be dedicated and not shared by other
devices (contactors, coils, etc..);
• the groups that the digital outputs are divided into have two common pole terminals to simplify wiring;
• make sure that the current running through the common terminals does not exceed the rated current of an individual terminal, that is, 8 A.
13
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
2.2.9
Serial port
Use AWG20/22 shielded three-wire cable (one twisted pair plus a third wire) with a capacitance between the wires of less than 90 pF/m (example: BELDEN
3106A). The shield must be connected to earth and not to the GND terminals. Alternatively, use AWG20/22 shielded twisted pair cable with a capacitance
between the wires of less than 90 pF/m (example: BELDEN 8761); use the shield to connect the GND terminals, without connecting it to earth. The maximum
length of the serial network is 500 m with AWG22 cable, 1000 m with AWG20 cable.
Serial
Serial ZERO
Type/connectors
pLAN/J10, J11
Serial ONE
BMS 1 Serial Card
Serial TWO
FieldBus 1 Serial Card
Serial THREE
BMS 2 / J25
Serial FOUR
FFieldBus 2 / J26 (and
J23 on Large and
Extralarge version)
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Integrated on main board
HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 pLAN
Not optically-isolated
Connectors: 6-pin telephone jack + 3-pin plug-in p. 5.08
Maximum length: 500 m
Max data rate: 115200 bit/s
Maximum number of connectable devices: 3
Not integrated on main board
HW driver: not featured
Can be used with all pRack family optional BMS cards
Not integrated on main board
HW driver: not present
Can be used with all pRack family optional FieldBus cards
Integrated on main board
HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 Slave
Optically-isolated
3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
Maximum length: 1000 m
Max data rate: 384000 bit/s
Integrated on main board
J23: not optically-isolated
J26: optically-isolated
3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
J23 and J26 are independent.
Tab. 2.k
Note: in industrial/residential environments, for distances > 10 m, shielded cable is required, with the shield connected to earth. In residential environments (EN
55014), irrespective of the cable length, on versions without valve driver, the connection cable between the controller and the terminal and the serial cable must be
shielded and connected to earth at both ends.
2.2.10 Model with electronic expansion valve driver
Valve compatibility
Motor connection
Digital input
connection
Sonde
CAREL: E*V****
ALCO: EX4; EX5; EX6; EX7; EX8 330 Hz (recommended by CAREL); EX8 500 Hz (from ALCO specifications)
SPORLAN: SEI 0.5-11; SER 1.5-20; SEI 30; SEI 50; SEH 100; SEH175
Danfoss: ETS 12.5-25B; ETS 50B; ETS 100B; ETS 250; ETS 400 CCM 40, CCM 10-20-30, CCMT 2-4-8
CAREL: two CAREL EXV as for EVD EVOLUTION TWIN
SPORLAN: SER(I) G, J, K
Shielded 4-wire cable CAREL P/N E2VCABS*00, or AWG22 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax =10 m,
or AWG14 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax 50 m
Digital input to be activated with voltage-free contact or transistor to GND.
Closing current 5mA; maximum length < 10 m
Maximum length 10 m or less than 30 m with shielded cable
S1 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S2 low temperature NTC
high temperature NTC
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 °C, -50T90 °C
50 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C
combined NTC
0 to 10 V input (max 12 V)
S3 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V):
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S4 low temperature NTC
high temperature NTC
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T120 °C
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-50T105 °C
10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C
combined NTC
Power to active
probes (VREF)
Emergency power
supply
10 kΩ at 25 °C, -40T120 °C
measurement error: 2% fs maximum; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs maximum; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs maximum; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs maximum; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1°C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C
measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115°C, 4 °C in range outside of
-20T115 °C
measurement error: 1°C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C
measurement error: 9% fs maximum; 8% typical
measurement error: 2% fs maximum; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs maximum; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs maximum; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs maximum; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1 °C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range 50T90 °C
measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115 °C; 4 °C in range outside of
-20T115 °C
measurement error 1 °C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C
programmable output: +5 Vdc ±2% or 12 Vdc ±10%, Imax = 50 mA
optional Ultracapacitor module (PCOS00UC20 or EVD0000UC0). If the controller operates constantly at temperatures near the upper limit of
60°C it’s recommended to use the external module EVD0000UC0, where possible located in the coolest point of the panel. The PCOS00UC20
and EVD0000UC0 modules can be connected at the same time to the same controller, thus doubling the energy available to close the valves.
Important: The module only powers the valve driver and not the controller.
Tab. 2.l
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
14
ENG
2.2.11 Meaning of the inputs/outputs on the pRack pR300 S, M, L boards
Version
S, M, L
M, L
S, M, L
M, L
L
Connector
J1-1
J1-2
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J4-1
J4-2
J4-3
J4-4
J4-5
J4-6
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J9
J10
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J15-1
J15-2
J15-3
J16-1
J16-2
J16-3
J16-4
J16-5
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J18-1
J18-2
J18-3
J19-1
J19-2
J19-3
J19-4
J19-5
J20-1
J20-2
J20-3
J20-4
J20-5
Signal
G
G0
B1
B2
B3
GND
+VDC
B4
BC4
B5
BC5
VG
VG0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
IDC1
B6
B7
B8
GND
ID9
ID10
ID11
ID12
IDC9
ID13H
ID13
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
RX-/TXRX+/TX+
GND
C1
NO1
NO2
NO3
C1
C4
NO4
NO5
NO6
C4
C7
NO7
C7
NO8
C8
NC8/--C9
NO9
NO10
NO11
C9
NO12
C12
NC12/--NO13
C13
NC13
ID15H
ID15
IDC15
ID16
ID16H
Y5
Y6
B9
BC9
B10
Description
+24 Vdc or 24 Vac power supply
power supply reference
universal analogue input 1 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 2 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 3 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
21 Vdc power supply for active probes (maximum current 200 mA)
passive analogue input 4 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 4
passive analogue input 5 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 5
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 24 Vac/Vdc
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
analogue output no. 1, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 2, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 3, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 4, 0…10 V
digital input no. 1, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 2, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 3, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 4, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 5, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 6, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 7, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 8, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 1 to 8 (negative pole for DC power supply)
universal analogue input 6 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 7 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 8 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
digital input no. 9, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 10, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 11, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 12, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 9 to 12 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 13, 230 Vac
digital input no. 13, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 13 and 14 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 14, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 14, 230 Vac
8-pin telephone connector for connecting a display terminal (not used)
6-pin telephone connector for connecting the standard pGDE user terminal
RX-/TX- connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
RX+/TX+ connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
GND connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
normally open contact, relay no. 1
normally open contact, relay no. 2
normally open contact, relay no. 3
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
normally open contact, relay no. 4
normally open contact, relay no. 5
normally open contact, relay no. 6
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 7/ normally open contact, relay no. 7 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 8/ only S-board: normally open contact, relay no. 8 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc, S board only (*)
common for relay no. 8
normally closed contact relay no. 8/ only S-board: not used, S board only (*)
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 9
normally open contact, relay no. 10
normally open contact, relay no. 11
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 12/ normally open contact, relay no. 12 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 12
normally closed contact relay no. 12/ not used (*)
normally open contact, relay no. 13 / normally open contact, relay no. 13 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 13
normally closed contact relay no. 13 / not used (*)
digital input no. 15, 230 Vac
digital input no. 15, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 15 and 16 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 16, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 16, 230 Vac
digital input no. 5 0…10 V
digital input no. 6 0…10 V
passive analogue input 9 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 9
passive analogue input 10 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
15
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Version
Connector
J20-6
J20-7
J20-8
J20-9
J21-1
J21-2
J21-3
J21-4
J21-5
L
J21-6
J22-1
J22-2
J22-3
J22-4
J22-5
J23-1
J23-2
J23-3
J23-1
L
J23-2
J23-3
J24-1
J24-2
J24-3
J25-1
J25-2
S, M, L, D
J25-3
J26-1
J26-2
J26-3
J27-1
J27-2
J27-3
J27-4
J28-1
J28-2
J28-3
J28-4
J29-1
J29-2
D
J29-3
J29-4
J29-5
J29-6
J29-7
J29-8
J30-1
J30-2
J30-3
(*) depending on model
Signal
BC10
ID17
ID18
IDC17
NO14
C14
NC14/--NO15
C15
NC15/--C16
NO16
NO17
NO18
C16
EE+
GND
EE+
GND
+V term
GND
+5 Vref
EE+
GND
EE+
GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
GND
VREF
S1
S2
S3
S4
DI1
DI2
VBAT
G0
G
Description
common for analogue input 10
digital input no. 17, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 18, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 17 and 18 (negative pole for DC power supply)
normally open contact, Relais no. 14/ normally open contact, Relais no. 14 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for Relais no. 14
normally closed contact Relais no. 14/ not used (*)
normally open contact, Relais no. 15/ normally open contact, Relais no. 15 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for Relais no. 15
normally closed contact Relais no. 15/ not used (*)
common for Relais: no. 16, 17, 18
normally open contact, Relais no. 16
normally open contact, Relais no. 17
normally open contact, Relais no.18
common for Relais: no. 16, 17, 18
E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
additional power supply terminal Aria (not used)
power supply common
power supply for 0/5 V ratiometric probes
E- terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
E+ terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
GND terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
E- terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
E+ terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
GND terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
Earth for the signals
Active probe power supply
Probe 1 (pressure) or external signal 4…20mA
Probe 2 (temperature) or external signal 0…10V
Probe 3 (pressure) or external signal 4…20mA
Probe 4 (temperature)
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Emergency power supply
Electrical power supply
Electrical power supply
Tab. 2.m
2.3 pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board dimensions
45
110
44
pR300
B
A
Fig. 2.d
A
B
B - with USB port and/or built-in terminal
B - with Ultracap module
Small
227,5
60
70
-
Medium
315
60
70
-
Buit-in driver
315
60
70
75
Large
315
60
70
-
Tab. 2.n
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
16
ENG
2.4 pRack pR300 general connection diagram
Small
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J10
4
3
2
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
J15
1
J26 FBus2
GND
+
pR300
-
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
RS485
BMS connections
White
IDC1
ID
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U1
White
Green
U3
U2
GND
U3
U2
U1
Black
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
4-20 mA Probe:
Ratiometric probe:
J2
U1
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U1
GND
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
B M S car d
+VDC
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
Fi eld Bus car d
Black
Green
(max 6 active probes)
Universal inputs
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5
(*)
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model
ID
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
17
OUT 4
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
AO/DO
24 Vac/ Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Medium
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J10
4
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
J17
J16
J15
NC12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
NO9
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
J18
1
J26 FBus2
GND
+
pR300
-
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
RS485
BMS connections
ID
White
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
4-20 mA Probe:
Green
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
J6
U1
GND
U3
U2
Black White
ID8
ID7
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
VG0
VG
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
U1
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J5
Ratiometric Probe:
J2
U1
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U1
GND
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
B M S card
+VDC
24 Vac/Vdc
Vac
V
ac/V
/Vdc
dc
0 Vac/Vdc
Vac/
Va
c/Vd
c/
Vdcc
Vd
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
Fi eldBus card
Black
Green
(* )
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model
or
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
18
0 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
ENG
Large
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
C13
C16
NO18
NO17
NO16
NC13
NO13
NC12
C12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
C16
-
U10
GND
ID17
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC17
GND
ID13
ID18
U9
Y6
ID13H
Y5
ID16H
ID16
ID15
ID15H
IDC15
GND
+
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
U4
U5
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
U2
Bianco
Verde
J8
ID
GND
ID9
GND
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
J6
Sonda 4-20 mA:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
Bianco
J20
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
Nero
Verde
(*)
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
GND
U9
Y6
Y5
J20
IDC17
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
or
24 Vac/Vdc
ID17
ID18
GND
U10
GND
U9
Y6
Y5
J20
IDC17
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
OUT 5
OUT 6
+VDC
U4
U1
GND
U3
+VDC
Nero
J19
J5
Sonda raziometrica:
J2
U2
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
GND
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J2
Ntc/Pt1000
U1
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
J24
B M S car d
J18
J23 FBus2
J22
RS485
BMS connections
J1
NO9
C8
NC8
J21
J26 FBus2
pR300
FieldBus card
NC15
1
J17
J16
C15
2
NC14
3
J15
NO15
C7
NO8
C7
4
C14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO7
J14
J13
NO14
J12
J11 pLAN
C4
NO6
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
19
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Built-in Driver
CAREL ExV valve A
pGDE pRack
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
CAREL ExV valve B
shield
3
2
Bianco
NC13
C13
NO13
NC12
C12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
DI2
DI1
ID
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Bianco
Verde
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
IDC9
ID13H
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
S4
S3
S2
S1
VREF
GND
G0
VBAT
G
GND
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
J6
4-20 mA Probe:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Nero
NO9
C8
-
GND
+
ID7
ID6
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
J2
J29
C D
A B
J5
Y2
J4
Ratiometric probe:
Ntc/Pt1000
J28
J30
B M S c ar d
J3
GND
U3
U1
GND
U2
J2
+5 VREF
+Vterm
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
J24
J27
1
RS485
BMS connections
J1
J18
J26 FBus2
pR300
FieldBus card
J17
J16
1
3
2
4
4
J15
1
3
2
4
J10
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
shield
Nero
Verde
(*)
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model
Connection with other different valve model
Key:
3
3
4
COMA
NOA
1 green
2 brown
2
4
5
2
6
1
4
3 white
4 red
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
3
5
5
5 black
6 blue
20
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
1
1
3
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
NTC driver A
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
DI1
S4
S3
S2
S1
VREF
GND
J29
ENG
External Driver (suitable for S/M/L/D)
C8
J10
4
3
2
NC8
-
C7
NO8
J15
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
GND
+
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
RS485
BMS connections
B M S ca rd
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
230 Vac
J5
Y2
J4
J3
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
24 Vac
35 VA
TRADRFE240
(dedicated)
shield
4
198 serial address
2
NOA
3
COMA
1
DI1
DI2
G
G0
VBAT
G0
VBAT
G
2 AT
S4
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
Field Bus card
S3
S1
VREF
S2
GND
Ultracap Technology
GND Tx/Rx
Connection with other different valve model
1
1
3
Key:
3
3
4
COMA
NOA
1 green
2 brown
2
4
5
2
6
1
4
3 white
4 red
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
3
5
5
5 black
6 blue
21
NTC driver A
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
3.
INSTALLATION
• in residential environments, the connection cable between the pRack
3.1 General installation instructions
3.1.1
pR300 and the terminal must be shielded;
• there is no limit to the number of cables that can be connected to an
Installation procedure
individual terminal. The only limitation concerns the maximum current
crossing each terminal: this must not exceed 8 A;
• the maximum cross-section of the cable that connected to a terminal is
2.5 mm2 (12 AWG);
• the maximum value of the twisting torque to tighten the screw on the
terminal (torque tightening) is 0.6 Nm;
Environmental conditions
Avoid assembling the pRack pR300 and the terminal in environments with the
following characteristics:
• temperature and humidity that do not conform to the rated operating
data of the product;
• strong vibrations or knocks;
• exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheres(e.g.: sulphur and
•
•
•
•
•
Important:
• Installation must be performed according to the standards and
ammonia fumes, saline mist, smoke) so as to avoid corrosion and/or
oxidation;
strong magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (therefore avoid
installing the units near transmitting antennae);
exposure of the pRack pR300 to direct sunlight and to the elements in
general;
large and rapid fluctuations in the room temperature;
environments containing explosives or mixes of flammable gases;
exposure to dust (formation of corrosive patina with possible oxidation
and reduction of insulation).
legislation in force in the country where the device is used;
• for safety reasons the equipment must be housed inside an electrical
panel, so that the only accessible part is the display and the keypad;
• in the event of malfunctions, do not attempt to repair the device, but
rather contact the CAREL service centre;
• the connector kit also contains the stick-on labels.
3.1.3
Positioning the instrument inside the panel
The position of the instrument in the electrical cabinet must be chosen
so as to guarantee correct physical separation of the instrument from the
power components (solenoids, contactors, actuators, inverters, …) and the
connected cables. Proximity to such devices/cables may create random
malfunctions that are not immediately evident. The structure of the panel
must allow the correct flow of cooling air.
3.1.2
3.2 Power supply
Power supply to the
pRack pR300 S, M;
L (controller with
terminal connected)
Power supply to
the pRack pR300
Compact
Wiring procedure
When laying the wiring, “physically “ separate the power part from the control
part. The proximity of these two sets of wires will, in most cases, cause
problems of induced disturbance or, over time, malfunctions or damage to the
components. The ideal solution is to house these two circuits in two separate
cabinets. Sometimes this is not possible, and therefore the power part and the
control part must be installed inside the same panel. For the control Signals, it is
recommended to use shielded cables with twisted wires.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Important:
controller using a class 2 safety transformer - 100 VA for the models with
built-in driver, and 50 VA for the pRack S, M, L models;
• the power supply to the pRack pR300 controller and terminal (or
pRack pR300 controllers and terminals) should be separated from the
power supply to the other electrical devices (contactors and other
electromechanical components) inside the electrical panel;
• if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire
corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal G0.
This applies to all the devices connected to the pRack pR300;
• a yellow LED indicates that power is connected to the pRack pR300.
each screw and insert the cable ends, then tighten the screws. When
the operation is completed, slightly tug the cables to check they are
sufficiently tight;
separate as much as possible the sensor Signal, digital input and serial
line cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables to
avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never insert power cables
(including the electrical cables) and probe Signal cables in the same
conduits. Do not install the sensor cables in the immediate vicinity of
power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or similar);
reduce the path of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid
spiral paths that enclose power devices;
avoid touching or nearly touching the electronic components fitted on
the boards to avoid electrostatic discharges (extremely damaging) from
the operator to the components;
if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire
corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal G0;
this applies to all the devices connected to the pRack pR300;
do not secure the cables to the terminals by pressing the screwdriver
with excessive force, to avoid damaging the pRack pR300;
for applications subject to considerable vibrations (1.5 mm pk-pk 10/55
Hz), secure the cables connected to the pRack pR300around 3 cm from
the connectors using clamps;
if the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m;
all the very low voltage connections (analogue and 24 Vac/Vdc digital
inputs, analogue outputs, serial bus connections, power supplies) must
have reinforced or double insulation from the mains network;
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
DC power supply: 48 Vdc (36 Vmin…72 Vmax)
AC power supply: 24 Vac +10/-15 %, 50/60 Hz
Maximum current P=11W, P=14VA, Imax=700mA
• power supplies other than those specified seriously damage the system;
• in the installation, it is recommended to supply just one pRack pR300
• Use cable ends suitable for the corresponding terminals. Loosen
•
28…36 Vdc +10/-20% or24 Vac +10/-15% 50…60 Hz;
Maximum current P= 15 W (power supply Vdc). P=40 VA
(Vac)
Tab. 3.a
If the control cables have to cross over the power cables, the intersections
must be as near as possible to 90 degrees, always avoiding running the control
cables parallel to the power cables.
•
Anchoring the pRack pR300
The pRack pR300is installed on a DIN rail. To fasten the unit to the DIN rail,
press it lightly against the rail. The rear tabs will click into place, locking
the unit to the rail. Removing the unit is just as Simple, using a screwdriver
through the release slot to lever and lift the tabs. The tabs are kept in the
locked position by springs.
3.3 Universal inputs/outputs
Universal inputs/outputs are distinguished by the letter U...
They can be configured from the application program for many different
uses, such as the following:
• passive temperature probes: NTC, PTC, PT500, PT1000;
• active pressure/temperature/humidity probes;
• ratiometric pressure probes;
• current inputs, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA;
• voltage inputs, 0 to 1 Vdc or 0 to 10 Vdc;
• voltage-free contact digital inputs and fast digital inputs;
• analogue outputs, 0 to 10 Vdc;
• PWM outputs.
Important:
• the universal inputs/outputs cannot be used as digital outputs.
22
ENG
Max. number of connectable analogue inputs
3.3.2
The maximum number of analogue inputs that can be connected to the
universal inputs/outputs depends on the type used.
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph.
The pRack pR300 can be connected to 2-wire PT1000 sensors for all high
temperature applications; the operating range is: -100 to 200 °C.
The inputs must be pre-configured for PT1000 Signals from the user
terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
Max. number of inputs connectable to
universal inputs/outputs
pCO5+
Medium/ Built-in
driver/ Extralarge
Small
- 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
inputs from externally
powered probes
- 0 to 5 V signals from
controller-powered
ratiometric probes
10
4
4
5
6:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
7:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
6
6:
(max 4 su U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
9:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
J24
GND
+Vterm
J1
10
+5VREF
8
6
G0
5
6
G
Tot. max. 8
5
Tot. max. 10
pR300
G
- 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
inputs from controller-powered probes
8
Tot. max. 7
Tot. max. 5
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc
signals from controller-powered probes
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc
signals from externally
powered probes
Tot. max. 4
Analogue inputs
- NTC/PTC/PT500/PT1000
5
probes
Large
Tot. max. 9
Type of signal
Connecting PT1000 temperature sensors
Fig. 3.b
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
6
Terminals
GND
U1...U10
PT1000 probe cable
1
2
Tab. 3.d
Tab. 3.b
Important: for correct measurement by the PT1000 sensor, each
sensor wire needs to be connected to a dedicated terminal, as
shown in Fig. 3.b.
Note: the two wires of the PT1000 sensors are equivalent, as they
have no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific
order when connecting to the terminal block.
Note: The table shows the maximum number of inputs that can be
connected. For example, a Small controller can be connected to a maximum
of five 0 to 1 Vdc inputs from controller-powered probes and a maximum of
five 0 to 1 Vdc inputs from externally powered probes. In any case, the
maximum number of inputs of both kinds that can be connected is 5.
3.3.1
Connecting universal NTC temperature sensors
3.3.3
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph.
The analogue inputs are compatible with 2-wire NTC sensors.
The inputs must be set for NTC Signals from the user terminal or using
the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown
below:
Connecting current pressure probes
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph pRack pR300 can be
connected to all CAREL SPK* series active pressure probes or any other
pressure sensors available on the market with 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Signal. The inputs must be set for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA signals from the
user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
pR300
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
J24
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
+5VREF
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
J24
+5VREF
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
pR300
Fig. 3.a
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
Terminals
GND
U1...U10, S2, S4
Fig. 3.c
NTC probe cable
1
2
Hardware
Version
S, M, D, L
Tab. 3.c
Note: the two wires of the NTC sensors are equivalent, as they have
no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific order
when connecting to the terminal block.
Terminals
Probe wire colour Description
+VDC
U1...U10, S1, S3
brown
white
Power supply
Signal
Tab. 3.e
Important: do not connect the green wire.
23
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
3.3.4
Connecting 0 to 5 V ratiometric pressure probes
Important:
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. pRack pR300 can be
connected to any other pressure probes available on the market with 0 to
5 V ratiometric sensor. The inputs must be set for 0 to 5 V Signals from the
user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
• the maximum current available at the digital input is 5 mA (thus the
rating of the external contact must be at least 5 mA).
• these inputs are not optically-isolated.
3.3.7
Remote connection of the analogue inputs
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the analogue inputs
are shown in the following table:
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
+Vterm
J24
+5VREF
G0
G
J1
Type of input Size [mm2] for
length up to 50 m
Size [mm2] for
length up to 100 m
NTC
PT1000
current
voltage
1.0
1.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.25
0.25
Tab. 3.i
Fig. 3.d
Hardware Terminals
Version
S, M, D, L
+5 V ref
GND
U1...U10, S1, S3
Probe wire
colour
black
green
white
If the product is installed in industrial enviroment (in compliance for
the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less
than 30m. In any case you should never exceed this length to have no
measurement errors.
Description
power supply
power supply reference
Signal
Tab. 3.f
3.3.5
3.4 Connecting the digital inputs
Connecting 0 to10 V active probes
The pRack pR300 features digital inputs for connecting safety devices,
alarms, device status and remote switches. These inputs are all optically
isolated from the other terminals at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc and some at 230 Vac
for M, D, L models.
Note: separate the sensor Signal and digital input cables as much as
possible from the inductive load and power cables, to avoid possible
electromagnetic disturbance.
Important:
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
+VDC
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. pRack pR300 can be
connected to 0 to10 V sensors. The inputs must be set for 0 to10 V Signals
from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
• if the control voltage is drawn in parallel with a coil, fit a dedicated RC
filter in parallel with the coil (the typical ratings are 100 Ω, 0.5 µF, 630 V).
• If connecting the digital inputs to safety systems (alarms), remember
that: the presence of voltage across the contact must be the normal
operating condition, while no voltage must represent an alarm situation.
This will ensure that any interruption (or disconnection) of the input will
also be Signalled. Do not connect the neutral in place of an open digital
input. Always interrupt the phase. The 24 Vac/Vdc digital inputs have a
Resistance of around 5 kΩ.
out H
M
out T
+ (G)
Fig. 3.e
Hardware Version
Terminals
+VDC
S, M, L, D
Description
All pRack digital inputs can be powered at 24 Vac and 24 Vdc, while for
models M, D, L only 230 Vac inouts are also available. To maintain the optical
isolation of the digital inputs, a separate power supply must be used just
for the digital inputs. The connection diagrams shown in these figures,
which while being the more common and the more convenient, do not
exclude the possibility of powering the digital inputs independently from
the power supply to the pRack pR300. In any case, the inputs only have
functional insulation from the rest of the controller.
power supply (any)
reference
Signal
GND
U1...U10
Tab. 3.g
3.3.6
Connecting analogue inputs selected as ON/OFF
24 Vac digital inputs
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be connected
see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. The pRack pR300 allows
some analogue inputs to be configured as voltage-free digital inputs,
not optically-isolated. The inputs must be pre-configured as voltage-free
digital inputs from the user terminal or using the default value installation
procedure.
G
G0
Fig. 3.f
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
Terminals
GND
U1...U10
Digital input cable
1
2
Tab. 3.h
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Fig. 3.g
24
ENG
24 Vdc digital inputs
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vdc
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
Hardware Version
S, M, D
L
+
–
Fig. 3.h
230 Vac digital inputs
pRack M, D, L models have up to two groups of inputs powered at 230
Vac 50/60 Hz +10/-15%; each group features two inputs. The groups have
double insulation between them and can have different voltages.
Important: within each group the inputs must be powered at the
same voltage to avoid short-circuits or powering lower voltage
inputs at 230 Vac.
Module for converting a 0…10 V analogue output to an SPDT digital
output (code CONVONOFF0)
The module is used to convert a 0…10 V analogue output to an ON/OFF
relay output. The control Signal (at the input terminals, optically-isolated
from the rest of the module), to ensure the switching of the relay from OFF
to ON, must have a maximum amplitude of 3.3 V. The relay is SPDT, with max
current of 10 A and max inductive load of 1/3 HP. The mechanical dimensions
of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN mod.) with IP20 index of protection.
The range of uncertainty of the switching threshold is from 43 to 90 Vac.
It is recommended to use a 100 mA fuse in series with the digital inputs.
The following figure represents an example for connecting the 230 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models M, D, L.
ID18
DC17
ID17
U10
Y6
U9
GND
Y5
ID16H
ID16
GND
J20
J19
IDC15
Optional modules
Module for converting a PWM analogue output to a liner 0…10 V and
4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0)
The module is used to convert a PWM output (5 V pulses) to a liner 0…10
V and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0). The control Signal
(at the input terminals optically-isolated from the rest of the module) must
have a maximum amplitude of 5V and a period between 8 ms and 200 ms.
The 0…10 V output voltage can be connected to a maximum load of 2 kW,
with a maximum ripple of 100 mV. The 4…20 mA current output can be
connected to a maximum load of 280 W, with maximum overshoot of 0.3
mA. The mechanical dimensions of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN
modules) with IP20 index of protection.
24 Vdc
ID15
Reference
VG0
VG0
Tab. 3.j
3.5.2
ID15H
Terminals
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6
3.6 Connecting the digital outputs
3.6.1
Electromechanical relay digital outputs
110/230 - 24 Vac
The pRack pR300 features digital outputs with electromechanical relays. For
ease of installation, the common terminals of some of the relays have been
grouped together. The following figure illustrates a connection example. If
the following this diagram is used, the current at the common terminals
must not exceed the rating (nominal current) of a single terminal (8 A).
Fig. 3.i
3.4.8
Remote connection of the digital inputs
Important note: do not connect other devices to the digital inputs
IDn inputs.
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital inputs are
shown in the following table:
Size (mm2) for length up to 50 m Size (mm2) for length until 100 m
Fig. 3.k
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m. This
length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement errors.
The relays are divided into groups, according to the degree of insulation.
Inside each group, the relays have just basic insulation and thus must have
the same voltage (generally 24V ac or 110 to 230 Vac). Between the groups
there is double insulation and thus the groups can have different voltages.
There is also double insulation from the rest of the controller.
0,25
0,5
Changeover outputs
Some relays feature changeover outputs, the number of changeover
outputs depends on whether or not there are solid state relays (SSR) and
consequently varies depending on the models.
3.5 Connecting the analogue outputs
3.5.1
Connecting 0…10 V analogue outputs
The pRack pR300 provides 0…10 V optically-isolated analogue outputs,
powered externally at 24 Vac/Vdc.
The figure below shows the electrical connection diagram; the 0V (zero) of
the power supply is also the reference for the output voltage:
Hardware version
PRK300**F* models
S
8
M, D
8, 12, 13
L
8, 12, 13, 14, 15
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
U9
GND
Y6
Y5
J20
Terminal
J15
J15, J17, J18
J15, J17, J18, J21
Tab. 3.k
3.6.2
Solid state relay (SSR) digital outputs
The pRack pR300 also features a Version with solid state relays (SSR) on
some models for controlling devices that require an unlimited number of
switching cycles and thus would not be supported by electromechanical
relays (e.g. screw compressor valves). They are dedicated to loads powered
at 24 Vac/Vdc with a maximum power Pmax = 10 W.
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
24 Vac/Vdc
0V
Changeover relay reference,
without SSR model
Important: the SSRs can control resistive loads powered at 24 Vac/Vdc.
For details see paragraph 2.2.8.
Fig. 3.j
25
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
The figure shows a connection example for resistive loads.
3.6.4
Remote connection of the digital outputs
24 Vac
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital outputs are
shown in the following table:
Size [mm2]
0,5
1,5
2,5
AWG
20
15
14
Current [A]
2A
6A
8A
Tab. 3.n
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m.
This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case.
Fig. 3.l
The following figure illustrates correct applications for inductive loads.
3.7 pLAN electrical connections
external SSR
NO11
C9
NO17
If the selected system configuration involves the connection of more than
one pRack pR300 board in a pLAN, AWG20/22 twisted pair shielded cable
must be used, with capacitance between the wires less than 90 PF/m.
The maximum length of the pLAN network is 500 m with AWG22 twisted
pair shielded cable.
The boards should be connected in parallel with reference to plug-in
connector J5 (pRack Compact) or J11 (versions S, M, L).
C15
J16
J21
J26 FBus2
NO18
C9
NO9
NO10
C16
NO16
C8
NC8
J15
NC15
C7
1
NC14
2
NO15
C7
3
NO14
4
C14
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
NO6
C4
NO5
C1
J13
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
input
load
management
J22
pR300
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
ID11
ID10
GND
U8
U7
J6
ID9
IDC1
U6
ID8
ID7
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
The figure shows the diagram for more than one board connected in
a pLAN network; this is a typical application with more than one board
connected inside the same electrical panel.
Fig. 3.m
AWG 20/22
U9
GND
ID13H
ID13
Y6
Y5
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
U8
ID9
U7
IDC1
U6
ID8
ID7
J6
Reference relay SSR
7, 8
7, 12
7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15
NC1
2
NO1
NO2
NO13
C9
C12
C1
NO12
C9
NO9
NO11
NO10
NO18
C16
U9
GND
U10
ID13
IDC1
VG 3
Y6
Y5
ID13H
IDC9
ID12
GND
ID11
U5
ID10
GND
ID16
ID16H
GND
+VDC
U8
GND
U7
U3
J2
J6
J7
J3
ID9
U4
IDC15
ID15
IDC1
U1
ID15H
+5 VREF
ID8
+Vterm
J24
ID6
GND
ID7
ID5
ID4
G0
ID3
G
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
J1
J20
FieldBus card
Important: pLAN connections are possible in which more than one
board is powered by different transformers; for further details see
pRack system general manual: +030220335.
Terminal
J14, J15
J14, J17
J14, J15, J17, J18, J21
Tab. 3.l
3.7.1
The connection can be made using 6-wire telephone cables (connector J4
for Compact models or J10 for S, M, L) or shielded twisted pair cables with
3-pin plug-in connectors (connector J5 for Compact models or J11 for S,
M, L), as shown in the table
Summary table of digital outputs according to
the Versions available
Changeover
contact
n.ro
outputs
relay in SSR
2 (8, 13)
-
8
13
18
2 (7, 8)
2 (7, 12)
6 (7, 12, 13, 14, 15)
Connecting the terminals
pRack pR300 uses PGD1 terminals, either built-in or external connected via
pLAN. Up to 2 external terminals can be connected, with pLAN addresses
31 and 32.
Important: the SSR relay load is powered at 24 Vac/Vdc, thus all the
other terminals in the group must be powered at 24 Vac/Vdc due to the
absence of double insulation within the group.
Hardware
NO
NC
version
contacts contacts
PRK300**E* Models
S
6
M, D
9
L
12
-
J3
J5
Fig. 3.p
The table below shows the reference outputs for pRack models fitted with
SSR outputs.
3.6.3
U2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
J2
J4
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J24
Fig. 3.n
Hardware version
S
M, D
L
C16
pR300
J19
B M S c ard
J19
B M S ca r d
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
G0
+Vterm
G
J2
+Vterm
G
J1
GND
pR300
J24
J23 FBus2
J22
J23 F
J22
FieldBus card
J1
NO17
C15
NC15
J21
J26 FBus2
pR300
Fi eld Bus car d
J1J1
72
J16
NO16
C8
C7
NC8
NC14
NO15
C7
NO8
J15
J11 pLAN
2 1
J10
C14
C4
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J25 BMS2
3
NO14
C12
NC12
NO12
J14
4
C16
NO17
NO18
NO16
C16
C15
NC15
J13
J10
J17
J16
J21
J26 FBus2
C9
NO11
C9
NO9
NO10
C8
C7
1
NC8
NO8
C14
2
NC14
3
NO14
4
J15
NO15
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
C4
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO1
C1
NO2
J13
J12
NO4
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
J11 pLAN
NO3
input
load
management
NO2
external SSR
NO1
24 Vac/Vdc
AWG 20/22
Dedicated or the same of
G-G0 but not in common
with other external load
U6
U2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
Important: follow the network polarity: RX/TX+ on one board must be
connected to RX/TX+ on the other boards; the same applies to RX/TX-.
J19
B M S car d
J4
J3
U3
U2
+5 VREF
J2
U1
GND
G0
+Vterm
G
J24
ID6
Fi eld Bus car d
J1
Cable type
6-pin phone
(J10)
AWG24
AWG20/22
Power supply distance
10 m
Power supply
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
200 m
500 m
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
Separate, via TCONN6J000
Tab. 3.o
PRK300**F* Models
S
7
M, D
10
L
13
-
1 (8)
3 (8, 12, 13)
5 (8, 12, 13, 14, 15)
8
13
18
-
For further details on connecting the terminals, see the pRack system
general manual: +030220335.
Tab. 3.m
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
26
ENG
4. START UP
4.1.1
4.1 Starting the first time
Pre-configurations
After having correctly installed pRack, a number of preliminary operations
are required to configure the installation.
Tutorial: the pRack pR300 configuration procedure varies according
to the complexity of the installation:
A. systems with only one board and maximum one external terminal.
In this case, simply connect the terminal (if not built-in), power up the
board and select one of the configuration solutions described below.
B. systems with more than one board in pLAN or two external terminals.
IIn this case, the additional operations described in Appendix A. 2
need to be completed before proceeding with configuration.
This solution is used to choose between fourteen configurations preloaded in the pRack pR300 software. For the description of the preconfigurations see the table below, while for the complete description
of each configuration see Appendix A1. pRack pR300 automatically
configures the inputs and outputs as described in paragraph 4.1.4; for
details on the inputs and outputs associated with each pre-configuration,
see the quick guide code +040000070.
The procedure for configuring an installation described below is the same
for all system configurations that feature just one pRack pR300 board, and
for system configurations with more than one board connected in a pLAN.
When first starting the pRack pR300 board, after waiting around 1 minute,
a screen is shown for choosing the language used to display the program
(English or Italian).
Press ENTER ( ) to change the language displayed, while pressing ESC
displays the following screen.
4.1.2
Wizard
Note:
• If no option is chosen within a time set by parameter and visible on the
screen, the current language remains selected.
• pRack pR300 is available as standard with English and Italian
languages loaded on board. Other languages are available at
ksa.carel.com that can be loaded onto the control using the pRack
Manager software, following the procedure described in Chap. 10.
This solution is used to obtain the recommended configuration for the
specific installation. By responding to a series of questions, screen by
screen, the user is guided through the selection of the devices present.
Once the guided selection procedure has been completed, the end result
(report) is shown, and if the configuration is suitable the parameters to
start operation of the pRack pR300 can be installed directly, including
those associated with the inputs and outputs as described in parag. 4.1.4.
After having selected the user interface language, the pRack pR300
software shows a screen for choosing between three possible system
configuration solutions, as follows:
• Pre-configurations
• Wizard
• Advanced configuration.
Note: after having configured the parameters using the Wizard, the
configuration can be modified manually, within the context of the
selected system configuration.
Important:
• after having configured the system, the configuration can be modified,
Important: before starting the pRack pR300, carefully check the
settings made automatically by the software.
it can be modified by repeating the same procedure, making sure the
Carel default values have been reset as described in paragraph 6.8.2.
• after having configured the system, power down the controller and
power up again.
Tutorial: Appendix A.3 shows a configuration example using the
Wizard for an installation with two suction lines.
Summary of pre-configurations
compressors
type
N°
index
lines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RS2
RS3
RS3p
RS3i
RS4
RS4i
SL3d
SL5d
SW1
SW2
d-RS2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
12
d-RS3
2
Pistoni - Scroll
13
d-RS4
2
Pistoni - Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
Screw
Vite
Pistoni - Scroll
N°
capacity step
modulation
2
3
3
3
4
4
3
5
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
Inverter
Inverter
Digital
Digital
Inverter
Inverter
2
2
-
No. of comp.
alarms
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
fans
N°
inverter
2
3
1
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
-
3
3
1
1
Inverter
Inverter
Units in the pLAN(as well pRack pR300 Version
as the terminal)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Small
Small
Medium
Medium
Medium
Large
Medium
Medium
Small
Small
Medium
1
Large
1,2
Medium + Medium
Tab. 4.a
(*) configuration not available in versions 1.0 and 1.1 of the pRack software.
27
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
4.1.3
Advanced configuration
This solution is used to establish the configuration of the pLAN structure
required for correct system operation.
Once the procedure for selecting the various factors that affect the final
configuration has been completed, the pRack pR300 software verifies
whether the pLAN configuration is exact and prepares the user interface
for configuration of the parameters that need to be set manually by the
user.
Important: this configuration solution is only recommended for
expert users, as all the system parameters need to be set manually.
4.1.4
Associating the inputs and outputs
When using pre-configurations and the wizard, pRack pR300 can
automatically associate the board’s inputs and outputs with the various
functions.
For the wizard only, after having configured the lines, automatic association
can be chosen as an option. If choosing not to use this function, the I/Os
need to be configured manually, according to requirements.
The criteria applied for automatic association are described below.
Digital outputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Compressor outputs: first the SSR outputs for screw or Digital Scroll™
then the starting outputs, the capacity control valves and the inverter,
if present
• Fan outputs
• Global alarm.
Digital inputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• High and low pressure switches (HP and LP)
• Compressor alarms
• Fan alarms
Note: pRack pR300 can also use certain analogue inputs as digital
inputs, nonetheless the common HP and LP pressure switches are always
associated with actual digital inputs.
Analogue inputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Pressure or temperature control probes for 1 or 2 lines, according to the
settings made. The types of probe asSigned as default are 4…20 mA or 0
to 5 V (first 4…20 mA, then 0 to 5 V if necessary) for the pressure probes,
NTC for the suction temperature probes and HTNTC for the condensing
temperature probes;
• Suction temperature probe on line 1: if possible this is associated with
input B3, otherwise the first free input;
• Discharge temperature probe on line 1;
• Suction temperature probe on line 2;
• Discharge temperature probe on line 2.
Analogue outputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Compressor inverters for 1 or 2 lines;
• Fan modulating devices for 1 or 2 lines.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
28
ENG
USER INTERFACE
5.
Customised main screen
pRack pR300 offers the possibility to configure the information displayed
on the main screen and the second screen (pressing DOWN) as desired. For
example, information on specific probes with physical readings (pressure
or temperature), no longer grouped by screen but rather customised rowby-row on the display. The basic structure comprises two screens that are
scrolled by pressing Up and Down; all the information can be configured
for display on the main screen relating to pressure or temperature, the
characteristic that is not selected will then be displayed on the secondary
screen, only if significant.
5.1 Graphic terminal
The pRack pR300 user interface is represented by the pGD1 terminal,
panel or built-in versions. The functions associated with the 6 buttons on
the pGD1 terminal are the same on all the screens and are described in
the table below.
Functions of the 6 buttons
Button
Function associated
(ALARM)
displays the list of active alarms and accesses the alarm log
used to enter the main menu tree
(UP)
(DOWN)
(ENTER)
Main screen
returns to the higher level screen
scrolls a list upwards or increases the value highlighted by the
cursor
scrolls a list downwards or decreases the value
highlighted by the cursor
enters the selected submenu or confirms the set value.
Tab. 5.a
The LEDs associated with the buttons have the following meanings.
Meaning of LEDs
LED
Red
éê
Button Meaning
Flashing: active alarms present and not acknowledged
Steady: alarms present and acknowledged
Yellow
Secondary screen
pRack pR300 on
Green
pRack pR300 powered
Tab. 5.b
5.2 Description of the display
There are three fundamental types of screens shown to the user:
• Main screen
• Customised main screen
• Menu screen
• Screen for displaying/setting the parameters
Fig. 5.b
In the example, a suction line with control by pressure has been configured,
the main screen displays the values read by the suction and condensing
pressure probes, while the superheat is displayed in degrees centigrade;
the secondary screen will show the converted temperatures of the suction
and condensing pressure probe readings, together with the description of
superheat by pressure, which is not displayed as this information would
not be significant. By default the main screen will continue to show the
same information as always displayed on the pR100 (depending on the
type of configuration: SUCTION&CONDENSER, rather than SUCTION and
the type of control PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE).
Main screen
The main screen is the screen that the software on board pRack pR300
automatically returns to 5 minutes after the last button was pressed.
An example of the main screen is shown in the figure, highlighting the
fields and icons used:
1
When starting the first time, the main screen will reflect the settings made.
Custom configuration of the main screen is then performed subsequently,
as described below:
The configuration is made under Settings -> Language in screen Fb04
2
4
3
5
Fig. 5.a
1
2
3
4
5
Time and date
Main values.
Unit status (unit off ) or compressor and fan status (unit on)
Active alarm Signal and manual operation
Access further information screens (menu branch A.a) by pressing button
On this screen, users can choose whether to configure the part relating to
the probes, or the bottom bar with the percentages or number of active
peripherals in the circuit.
Note:
• the information shown on the main screen varies according to the system
configuration (one line, two lines, two lines with shared condenser) and
the type of control value used (pressure or temperature). For two line
systems, a parameter is used to select which line is shown first.
• the other information shown in menu branch A.a. varies according to
the system configuration. For two line systems, pressing
from the
main screen accesses a different screen based on the starting point (line
1, line 2).
29
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
The screen identifier uniquely identifies the menu branch and the
screen: the first characters indicate the menu branch, while the last two
alphanumeric digits identify the screen within the menu; for example
screen Bab01 is the first screen in menu Bab.
On screen Fb04, go to the field underneath “Probe configuration”, change
the value to “CONFIGURE” and press Enter. The following screen (Fb05) is
displayed, which shows the layout of the main screen with the modifiable
fields for each row. The following options are available:
Probe
Suction
Condenser
Superheat
L1 – Suction
L2 – Suction
L1 – Condenser
L2 – Condenser
Suction temperature
L1 - Suction temperature
L2 - Suction temperature
Discharge temperature
L1 – Discharge temperature
L2 – Discharge temperature
Auxiliary
L1 - Auxiliary
L2 - Auxiliary
L1 - Superheat
L2 - Superheat
EVD1 - Condenser
EVD2 - Condenser
Description
Suction used for single suction line
Condenser used for single condenser line
Superheat used for single suction line
Suction on line 1
Suction on line 2
Condenser on line 1
Condenser on line 2
Suction temperature for single suction line
Suction temperature on line 1
Suction temperature on line 2
Discharge temperature for single suction line
Discharge temperature on line 1
Discharge temperature on line 2
Auxiliary probe for single suction line
Auxiliary probe on line 1
Auxiliary probe on line 2
Superheat on line 1
Superheat on line 2
Condenser line 2 connected to driver 1
Condenser line 2 connected to driver 2
Note: the information contained on the screens may vary according
to the password level used to access it.
5.3 Password
pRack pR300 manages three levels of password:
• User
• Maintenance
• Manufacturer
Each level includes the same rights as the lower levels, that is, the
Manufacturer can access all the screens and parameters, the Maintenance
can access the screens and parameters available in the Maintenance and
User levels, while the User can only access the screens and parameters
available in the User level.
Tab. 5.c
Note: All levels display the main screens and the other information
screens.
When pressing
a prompt is shown to enter the password, which
remains active for 5 minutes after the last button is pressed.
After having configured the required information, choose the characteristic
to be displayed on the main screen, Pressure or Temperature.
The menu screens show their own password level using an icon at the top
right: 1 line: user, 2 lines: maintenance, 3 lines: manufacturer.
The password level can be changed from menu branch F.d. at any time.
The password can also be changed in the corresponding menu branch.
To exit this screen, simply press Esc and return to the Language menu.
5.4 Description menu
Main menu – Function tree
The following general rules apply to the user interface:
• The parameters are grouped by functions and where necessary
repeated, for example the status of the compressors inputs/outputs is
visible in both branch C.a.a (Compressors), and in branch B.a (Inputs/
Outputs)
• The parameters are grouped by type of access, first User then
Maintenance then Manufacturer
• The most frequently used parameters are indicated first, the less
frequently used are last
• Each user only sees the parameters and menu items that are available
for that access level
• Only the screens and parameters corresponding to the selected
system configuration are visible, that is, corresponding to the devices
configured. The exception to this rule involves the screens relating to
functions that can be enabled/disabled (e.g. set point compensation),
which are visible even when disabled.
Menu screen
An example of a menu screen is shown in the figure:
In the top right corner, the number of the selected item among those
present and the current password level are shown (see the following par.
&
buttons sto select the desired menu item
for details). Use the
and use
to access the selected item.
Parameter display/setting screen
An example of a screen for displaying/setting the parameters is shown in
the figure, also highlighting the fields and icons used:
Fig. 5.b
1 Menu branch identifier
2 Screen identifier
3 Parameters
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
30
ENG
Regardless of the current screen displayed, pressing the
button accesses the main menu, as shown below:
A.Unit status
B.In/Out
a.Main info
b.Set point
c.On/Off
a.Status
C.Compressors
a.Line 1 (*)
D.Condensers
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
E.Other func.
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Oil
a.Digital in
b.Analog in
c.Digital out
d.Analog out
a.Digital out
b.Analog out
a.Digital out
b.Analog out
a.I/O status
b.Control
c.Op. hours
d.Energy saving
e.Alarms
f.Config.
g.Advanced
….
a.I/O status
b.Control
c.EEV
d.Energy saving
e.Alarms
f.Config.
g.Advanced
….
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Subcool
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
c.Economiser
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
d.Liquid inj.
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
e.Heat recovery
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Manual op.
c.Test
f.Generic func.
g.ChillBooster
h.DSS (*)
i.EVS
F.Settings.
a.Clock
b.Languages
c.BMS
G.Safety
d.Password
a.Log
b.Prevent
c.Alarm config.
H.Info
I.Setup
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Stages
b.Modulation
c.Alarms
d.Time bands
e.I/O status
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.I/O status
b.Settings
a.Temperature control
b.Manual management
c.I/O status
d.Control
e.Valve configuration
f.Driver configuration
aTime bands
b.Adjust
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
c.EEV
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
c.EEV
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings.
….
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Pre-configurations
b.Wizard
c.Advanced config.
d.Default
(*) this menu level is only visible for system configurations with two lines.
Note:
• The figure illustrates the maximum menu configuration visible with the Manufacturer password. If accessing with the User or Maintenance password, only
the menu items available are visible
• For some menu items, access is possible with different password levels (e.g. I/O status), but the information available on the screens changes.
.
31
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
6.
FUNCTIONS
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 suction lines and 2 condenser lines.
Many of the functions described in this chapter apply in the same way to
all the lines (e.g.: control, rotation), while others apply in the same way to
the suction lines (e.g.: oil management). The exception involves the generic
functions that apply, irrespective of line, suction or condenser, to pRack
boards with pLAN addresses from 1 to 4. Where not expressly indicated
or where it is clear that the description refers to one specific line rather
than another (e.g.: compressor or fan management), the descriptions
are considered as being common to all lines; any specific Situations are
described on a case-by-case basis.
When there are two suction and condenser lines, on-off is independent for
each line, while when there are two suction lines and one condenser line, it is
independent for the suction lines, while the condenser line stops when both
suction lines are off, and starts when at least one suction line is on.
Note: Certain special conditions or functions in the pRack software
cause the unit to shutdown:
• Configuration of some parameters: e.g. inputs/outputs, configuration of
compressors, inverter parameters.
• Installation of default parameters
• Manual management
Below is a chart of the main functions described and their field of
application:
Function
Control
Compressors
Energy
saving
Accessory
functions
Unit On-Off
P+I control
Control in Neutral zone
Modulation in Neutral zone
Control with backup probes
Rotation
Modulation device
Screw compressors
Reciprocating and scroll
compressors
Digital Scroll™ compressors
Bitzer CRII compressors
Fan management
Set point compensation
Floating set point
Oil management
Subcooling
Economizer
Liquid injection
Heat recovery
Generic functions (*)
ChillBooster
DSS
L1 suc- L2 suc- L1 con- L2 contion
tion
dens.
dens.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
-
6.2 Control
pRack pR300 can manage two types of control:
• Proportional band (P, P+I);
• Neutral zone (fixed times, variable times).
Both types of control can be applied to both compressors and condensers,
according to the settings defined during start-up or in main menu branches
C.a.b/C.b.b and D.a.b/D.b.b. The type of control chosen is independent for
each line present, either suction or condenser.
In addition, pRack pR300 can use as the reference for control either the
pressure or the converted temperature, or the temperature read by probe
if there is no pressure probe, even if reference is only made to pressure
below.
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
-
The control set point can be compensated by an offset linked to digital
inputs, probes, supervisor or time bands, for details see paragraph 6.5
relating to compressor and fan energy saving.
Both types of control are described below, and are valid for both control
of suction pressure and condensing pressure, and operation with backup
probes and/or probes not working.
Tab. 6.a
(*) not linked to lines, but rather the pLAN address of the boards
6.2.1
The functions are described in detail in the following paragraphs.
The operating principle is normal proportional or proportional + integral
control (P, P+I). The control set point is central, consequently - for
proportional control only - operation is schematised in the following figure:
Proportional band
6.1 Unit On-Off
Regulation request
The unit can be switched on and off from:
• User terminal
• Supervisor
• Digital input
100%
On-off from the user terminal and the configuration parameters are
available under the main menu, branch A.c, and are differentiated based
on the access level; the User password allows display only.
On-off from the supervisor and from the digital input and start-up after
a blackout (with specific delay, to avoid continuous starts and stops in
the event of instability in the power supply) must be enabled using the
parameters visible only with the Manufacturer password.
On-off from the digital input is equivalent to an enabling Signal, that is, if
the digital input is Off the unit cannot be switched on in any other way,
while if is On, the unit can be switched on or off in any other way, with
the same priority (the most recent control has precedence, whatever the
origin), as shown in the figure:
Differential
Differential
Regulation
probe value
Setpoint
Fig. 6.b
For example, for 4 devices with the same capacity and proportional only
control, start-up occurs as shown in the figure:
Devices activation
Digital Input
C1
C2
C3
C4
User interface
Supervisor
Differential
Differential
Setpoint
Unit On/Off
Fig. 6.c
Fig. 6.a
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
32
Suction
pressure
ENG
With P+I control, added to the effect of the proportional action described
above is the integral action, used to achieve a null control error in steady
operation, as shown in the figure:
For control in Neutral zone, the parameters shown in the figure must be
set:
NZ timings
Decrease
zone
Regulation variable
P+I
Neutral
zone
Increase
zone
Max time 100%
P
Max time 0%
Min time 0%
Setpoint
Min time 100%
time
Fig. 6.d
Decr. Diff.
The integral action depends on the time and the deviation from the set
point. This modifies the request if the control value does not approach the
set point for some time.
The integral time setting represents how fast integral control is
implemented:
• low values determine fast and intense control action
• high values determine slower and more stable control action
It is recommended to not set a value that is too low for the integral time,
to avoid instability.
Diff.
Incr. Diff.
Regulation
probe value
Setpoint
Fig. 6.f
As well as the decrease and increase differentials, 4 times need to be set,
two for each zone, which represent the maximum and minimum time
to reach the request, equal to 0% or 100%, for the decrease and increase
respectively.
Tutorial: the decrease/increase times (minimum and maximum)
represent the time needed to change from maximum to minimum
capacity and vice-versa, and not the time between the deactivation/
activation of the individual device. For example, in the case of 4 devices
with the same capacity, an increase time of 180 s means that one device is
activated every 45 s.
Note: the set point is in the centre of the activation band, therefore
when reaching the set point some devices are on, even with purely
proportional control.
6.2.2
Diff.
Neutral zone
In the situation shown in the figure, the request sent by the controller
decreases/increases slowly as soon as the controlled value is outside of the
Neutral zone, while it decreases/increases quickly the further the controlled
value moves away from the Neutral zone; in this way the response of the
system is faster when further from steady conditions.
The operating principle is schematised in the following figure:
Regulation request
Decrease
zone
Neutral
zone
Increase
zone
Note: When using fixed times, the maximum and minimum must be
set to the same value. In this case, the request sent by the controller
decreases/increases constantly inside the deactivation/activation
differential.
100%
6.2.3
Force off
Diff.
Diff.
Modulation in Neutral zone
pRack pR300 can activate a specific function inside the Neutral zone if
modulating devices are used (e.g.: inverters). This function can be enabled
in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g.
Regulation
probe value
Modulation in Neutral zone is used to vary the request sent by the
controller inside the Neutral zone proportionally so as to enter the
decrease zone with the minimum request and the increase zone with the
maximum request, meaning a device can be immediately deactivated/
activated when exiting the Neutral zone.
This makes it possible to remain longer inside the neutral zone without
starting or stopping any device.
Setpoint
Fig. 6.e
Inside the neutral zone the capacity request sent by the controller is
constant (except when there is a modulation device and modulation is
enabled inside the neutral zone, as described in the following paragraph)
and the value satisfies the temperature control request in those specific
operating conditions, therefore within this zone no device is stopped or
started.
An example of this operation is shown in the figure:
Regulation request
In the decrease zone, the request also decreases at a rate that depends on
the deviation from the set point, and vice-versa in the increase zone the
request increases proportionally to the deviation.
Neutral zone
100%
For the increase and decrease zones, the following can be used:
• Fixed times: the request decreases or increases constantly as time
elapses.
• Variable times: the request decreases or increases more quickly
(according to the settings) as the deviation from the set point increases.
P1
Note: The previous figure shows the increase and decrease with
fixed times.
Regulation probe value
Fig. 6.g
33
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
When entering the Neutral zone, the pRack pR300 software calculates how
the request needs to change in order to exit the Neutral zone at minimum
or maximum output, and applies one of the two values according to the
trend in variation in the control variable. For example, at point P1 in the
figure, the trend of the two requests is represented by the segments with
thin lines, and the request ‘reverses’ because at that point the control
variable has started increasing in value again.
Note: When exiting the Neutral zone, it is possible that the request is
not at the minimum or maximum value, where limitation is enabled for of
the modulating device variation speed.
6.2.4
Control with backup probes and/or probes not
working
pRack pR300 can use backup control probes that are activated when the
normal control probes are not working.
The backup probes must be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or
D.a.g/D.b.g.
The type of control, band limits or differentials and the set point need
to be configured under “Compressors -> Control”, in the same way as for
traditional control.
When different pRack boards are used to manage the suction and
condenser lines, the backup suction pressure probe must be connected
to the board that manages the suction line, while the backup condensing
pressure probe can be connected either to the board that manages the
suction line or the board that manages the condenser line.
The limits for the auxiliary probe alarms, are set under “Compressors ->
Alarms” and need to be configured depending on the type of probe and
refrigerant. When an alarm goes off, this is saved in the log, with a special
screen shown when pressing the alarm bell.
If the main control probes are not working and no backup probes are
fitted, or the backup probes are also not working, or the corresponding
temperature probes are also not working, fixed values are used for the
control request, set in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g.
6.2.5
Auxiliary control
pRack pR300 offers the possibility to control the compressors on a single
suction line (or L1 for double lines) using an auxiliary probe. Normal control
based on the suction pressure probe reading (or converted temperature)
can be replaced by control based on a different probe. This solution can
manage the secondary refrigerant in “water chiller” or “pumped” systems,
offering greater system stability and at the same time guaranteeing
compressor safety via the suction probe, which must always be installed.
Auxiliary control is enabled under “Compressors -> Control”, selecting the
type of control (by temperature or pressure) and the type of refrigerant,
which may differ from the main one.
The function does not need to be enabled if “water chiller” is set in the
installation Wizard:
as auxiliary control by temperature probe is enabled automatically.
Choosing a “pumped” system, on the other hand, automatically enables
auxiliary control by pressure probe (see Appendix A.2)
Note: when auxiliary control is enabled, it is recommended to also
enable the prevent low suction pressure function, see paragraph 8.3.4
(prevent low suction pressure). In case of pumped systems, don’t configure
the second condensing line.
Once the auxiliary probe is enabled on screen Cab20, the associated
universal input, the probe type, the correct limits (for pressure probes) and
calibration (if necessary) can be selected under “Inputs Outputs -> Status
-> Analogue inputs”
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
34
ENG
6.3 Compressors
6.3.2
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 suction lines with different types of
compressors and capacity modulation devices, applying common types of
device rotation and controlling both the start mode and the safety times
for each type of compressor, as well as a number of accessory functions.
pRack pR300 can manage 4 different types of device rotation:
• FIFO (First In First Out): the first device to start is also the first to stop
• LIFO (Last In First Out): the last device to start is the first to stop
• By time: the device with the least number of operating hours starts and
the device with highest number of operating hours stops
• Custom: the on/off sequences are defined by the user
The compressor functions and related parameter settings are enabled
from main menu branch C.a/C.b.
Rotation
These features and functions are described in detail in the following
paragraphs.
Note: Different Sizes of compressors can only be managed with
Custom rotation.
6.3.1
The type of rotation is selected and the corresponding parameters set
during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
Possible compressor configurations
pRack pR300 can manage different types of compressors:
• Reciprocating
• Scroll
• Screw
Moreover, a capacity modulation device is allowed for each suction line,
which may be one of the following, according to the type of compressor:
The activation thresholds are calculated differently depending on whether
FIFO, LIFO, time or Custom rotation is used:
Device activation threshold calculation
Rotation
FIFO
LIFO
By time
Custom
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
modulation devices
Inverter
Inverter
Digital Scroll™
Inverter
Continuous capacity control
Modulating capacity control
Scroll
Screw
Bitzer CRII
Threshold calculation
Static: the range of variation of the control request is divided equally
between the number of stages available
Dynamic: the thresholds are calculated depending on the
capacity effectively available
Tab. 6.d
Example 1: FIFO rotation, 4 compressors of the same capacity
without load stages.
Tab. 6.b
Note: The same modulation device is used on each line.
The activation thresholds are 25, 50, 75 and 100 %.
The maximum number of compressors and load stages per line varied
according to the type of compressor:
C2
C1
C3
C4
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
Scroll
Screw
Bitzer CRII
Maximum No.
12
12
2
2
Load stages
24 total
24 total
4
3
25%
50%
Example 2: Custom rotation, 4 compressors with capacities of 10, 20,
30 and 40 kW. The activation thresholds with all the compressors available
are 10, 30, 60, 100 %.
Note: Screw compressors can only be configured on line 1 and the
board must be dedicated only to line 1. One Bitzer CRII compressor can be
configured for each line.
The compressor size refers to its capacity and number of load stages or
to the inverter presence, therefore different sizes need to be defined for
compressors with the same capacity yet a different number of load stages.
The inverter is always associated to size 1.
C1
C2
10%
Tutorial: below is one example of some possible configurations:
C3
30%
C4
60%
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first
•
•
•
•
100% Regulation request
Fig. 6.h
Tab. 6.c
•
75%
100% Regulation request
Fig. 6.i
with inverter (2 sizes).
One line, 4 scroll compressors with the same capacity, the first Digital
Scroll™ (1 sizes).
One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first
two with 4 load stages, the other two not capacity-controlled (2 sizes).
One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity and 4
load stages each (1 size).
Two lines, line 1 with 2 screw compressors with the same capacity, the
first with continuous modulation, line 2 with 4 reciprocating compressors
with two different capacities, the first two with 4 load stages, the other
two with 2 load stages (1 size on line 1, 2 sizes on line 2).
Two lines, line 1 with 4 scroll compressors, the first Digital Scroll™, line
2 with 4 reciprocating compressors, the first with inverter (1 size line 1,
2 sizes line 2).
If an alarm is active on compressor 3, the recalculated activation thresholds
are 10, 30, 70 %.
C2
10%
C4
30%
70%
Regulation request
Fig. 6.j
Activation of the compressors and load stages may be:
• Grouped (CpppCppp): first all the load stages are activated on one
compressor before starting the next one
• Balanced (CCpppppp): first all the compressors are started at minimum
capacity and then the corresponding load stages are activated, one for
each compressor, in sequence.
35
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
6.3.3
Rotation with modulation devices
Example 2: range of modulating device capacity variation lower
than the capacity of the compressors: two compressors without capacity
control, with the same capacity, 30 kW each, modulating device with
variable capacity between 20 and 40 kW.
It can be seen that the capacity delivered does not exactly follow the
required capacity, rather acts in steps, so as to avoid swings.
pRack pR300 can also manage compressor rotation when a capacity
modulation device is fitted (inverter, Digital Scroll™ or continuous control).
The type of modulating device is selected and the corresponding
parameters set during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f and C.a.g/C.b.g
Actual capacity (kW)
The modulating device is always the first to start and the last to stop
irrespective of the type of rotation, the other devices start or stop according
to the type of rotation selected.
100
80
Note: The compressor with modulation device is also assumed to be
the first.
60
40
The trend in capacity delivered by the modulation device depends on the
capacity of the compressor with the modulating device compared to the
other compressors available.
20
Three cases can be identified:
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device greater than or equal to the capacity of the
compressors
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device less than the capacity of the compressors
• compressors with different capacities
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.l
Esempio 3: range of modulating device capacity variation in
between the capacity of the compressors, all different sizes: two
compressors without capacity control, capacities 15 kW and 25 kW,
modulating device with variable capacity between 10 and 30 kW.
In the first case, the modulating device manages to continuously cover the
range of variation of the control request, while in the second case some
discontinuous variations remain. The behaviour in the third case varies
according to the capacities involved, and in any case reflects one of the
two previous cases.
Actual capacity (kW)
70
50
To configure the compressor capacity when an inverter is used, the
minimum and maximum operating frequencies need to be set relating to
the minimum and maximum value of the analogue output and the rated
capacity delivered at rated frequency (50 Hz), so that the pRack pR300
software can calculate the capacity the compressor can deliver with the
inverter and use this value for control. In addition, for inverters the variation
in capacity delivered can be limited by setting the increase and decrease
times. If these times have already been configured on the inverter, the
higher time set has priority.
30
10
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.m
Example 1: range of modulating device capacity variation higher than
the capacity of the compressors:
6.3.4
Starting
pRack pR300 can manage different types of compressor starting:
• Direct
• Part-winding
• Star/delta
two compressors without capacity control, with the same capacity, 20
kW each, modulating device with variable capacity between 30 and 60
kW. The figure shows the trend when the request sent by the controller
increases and then decreases continuously between 0 and 100 %. It can be
seen that the capacity delivered exactly follows the required capacity, except
when below the minimum capacity of the modulating device.
The type of starting can be selected and the related parameters set in main
menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
For part-winding starting, the delay in activating the digital output that
controls the second winding needs to be set:
Actual capacity (kW)
100
Compressor request
80
Line
60
40
Part-winding
20
Delay
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.n
For star/delta starting, the star time, the delay between the activation of
the line and star digital input, and between the delta and star digital input
all need to be set, as shown in the figure:
Fig. 6.k
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
36
ENG
6.3.8
Compressor request
Line
Part-winding
Delta
Star-line delay
Delay
Liquid injection
As an alternative to the economizer, pRack pR300 can manage the
injection of liquid into the compressors (the two functions are alternative,
as the point of vapour injection into the compressor is the same).
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch E.d.a.b/E.d.b.b. Liquid injection is used to protect the compressor,
and in fact decreases the discharge temperature.
Operation is Similar to the economizer function, with the difference that
the expanded liquid is not sent to a heat exchanger, but rather directly into
the compressor. The function is only activated when the compressor is on
and the discharge temperature exceeds a set threshold (with differential).
Start-delta
delay
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6 compressors.
Fig. 6.o
6.3.5
6.3.9
Safety times
pRack pR300 can manage common safety times for each compressor:
• Minimum on time: this is always considered, with the exception of when
an alarm is activated that is configured to stop the compressor
• Minimum off time
• Minimum time between consecutive starts
Enabling / disabling is managed in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f., while
manual management and the output test can be activated in main menu
branch B.b or B.c.
In addition, pRack pR300 can manage the specific times for Digital Scroll™
compressors and screw compressors; for the descriptions see paragraphs
6.3.10 and 6.3.11. The related parameters can be set in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f.
Enabling / disabling is used to temporarily exclude the compressors from
operation, to allow, for example, repair or replacement. The disabled
compressors are also excluded from rotation.
Note: for two lines, a further delay can be set between starts of the
compressors on different lines, so as to avoid Simultaneous starts.
See paragraph 6.6.6 for the detailed description of the synchronisation
function for two lines (DSS).
6.3.6
Note: enabling is the only compressor manual operating mode that
can be activated when the unit is on.
Both manual management and the output test are enabled by parameter
and remain active for a set time after the last button is pressed, after which
the unit returns to normal operating mode.
Manual management is used to switch the compressors on or off
without observing the control needs, however still considering any safety
devices (alarms, safety times, starting procedures) and respecting the set
configuration of the inputs/outputs.
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used
to override the outputs relating to the operation of the selected device,
e.g. compressor 1:
Balancing
pRack pR300 can control any balance valves in parallel with the
compressors.
This function can be used to activate a communicating solenoid valve
between compressor suction and discharge, for a set time, before each
individual compressor starts. In this way, the suction and discharge
pressure can be balanced and the compressor can be started in more
favourable conditions.
The balancing function can be enabled and the related activation time set
in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
6.3.7
Manual operation
pRack pR300 can manage 3 different compressor manual operating
modes:
• Enabling / disabling
• Manual management
• Output test
Economizer
pRack pR300 can activate the economizer function to boost compressor
efficiency by injecting vapour. Some of the liquid is taken from the
condenser, expanded through a valve and then sent to a heat exchanger
to cool the liquid leaving the condenser. The resulting superheated vapour
is injected into a special section of the compressor.
The economizer function is enabled by going from the main menu to
“Other functions”à “Economizer” à “Settings”. Screens Ecab05 onwards
are used to modify the economizer function activation parameters.
The output test is used to activate or deactivate the outputs (where
necessary setting an output percentage for the analogue outputs),
without observing any type of safety feature.
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used
to override the outputs on the pRack boards, in the order they physically
appear on the board (without links to the devices):
The economizer is only efficient for high compressor activation capacities,
typically over 75 %, therefore the economizer function control valve is only
activated when exceeding a set threshold.
As the economizer tends to increase the condensing pressure, this needs
to be controlled to ensure the high condensing pressure alarm is not
generated. In addition, the injection of vapour decreases the discharge
temperature and so this value also needs to be monitored.
Consequently, the three conditions for activation of the economizer
function are:
• Capacity above a set threshold
• Condensing pressure below a set threshold (with reset differential)
• Discharge temperature above a set threshold (with reset differential)
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6 compressors.
Important: manual mode and the output test can only be activated
with the unit off.
Both manual mode and above all the output test must be used with
special care and by expert personnel to avoid damage to the devices.
37
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Starting procedure
pRack pR300 can manage the specific starting procedure for Digital Scroll™
compressors, as represented as in the following figure:
6.3.10 Digital Scroll™ compressors
pRack pR300 can use a Digital Scrollä compressorä as the modulating
device for suction lines (one for each line). This type of compressor features
special operation, and is controlled by pRack pR300 as follows. The related
parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. The capacity is
modulated by opening/closing a valve with PWM; when the valve is ON
the compressor delivers minimum capacity, while when the valve is off the
compressor delivers maximum capacity. In the following description and
figure, ON and OFF refer to the status of the compressor, while operation
of the valve is the exact opposite:
4s
50s
100s
Valve
Compressor
Startup
Compressor PWM
modulation
10%
13s
10s
15s
15s
Fig. 6.q
There are three stages:
1. balance: the PWM valve is activated for 4 s, so that the compressor
delivers minimum capacity;
2. compressor activation with 50 % capacity for 3 minutes;
3. forced operation at 100 % for 1 minute.
5s
During the starting procedure, the request sent by the controller is ignored and
only at the end of the procedure does the capacity delivered start reflecting the
request. If the request is cancelled during the starting procedure, the compressor
stops at the end, then the min. ON time for these types of compressors is set
to 244 s. The starting procedure is performed when the compressor is started,
while it can be disabled for a set time by parameter for subsequent starts, if the
compressor has not remained off for a minimum set time. After this time has
elapsed the procedure is performed again during the following start.
Variable cycle time
18s
8s
20s
time
67%
Fixed cycle time
ON
OFF 2s
60s
Request
Compressor power request
ON
OFF 2s
180s
4s
12s
Fig. 6.p
The following data are provided by the manufacturer of the compressor:
• minimum ON time 2 s
• maximum cycle time 20 s
• optimum cycle time 12 s
Note: the safety times for Digital Scroll™ compressors are established
by the manufacturer, and are as follows:
• Minimum ON time: 244 s (starting procedure)
• Minimum OFF time: 180 s
• Minimum time between restarts: 360 s
There are three possible operating modes:
• Fixed cycle time
• Variable cycle time
• Optimised cycle time
Alarms
pRack pR300 can manage, in addition to the common alarms for all types
of compressors (see chapter 8 for details), some specific alarms for Digital
Scroll™ compressors:
• high oil temperature
• oil dilution
• high discharge temperature
These alarms are managed as specified by the manufacturer of the
compressor, and therefore pRack pR300 can only enable or disable them.
Activation of these alarms requires an oil temperature probe, which can
also be the common probe (see the paragraph relating to oil management)
and the compressor discharge temperature probe.
Based on the operating mode selected, pRack pR300 calculates the valve
activation percentage that satisfies the required capacity.
Fixed cycle time
The compressor ON time is calculated as the percentage of the cycle time
corresponding to the required capacity:
TON= % Request * Cycle Time
The cycle time can be set to the optimum value suggested by the
manufacturer to achieve maximum COP, or to a higher value to increase
resolution of the capacity delivered (a higher cycle time implies greater
continuity in the effective capacity that can be delivered).
Note: pRack pR300 does not manages the envelope for Digital
Scroll™ compressors and consequently there is no corresponding alarm
when operating outside the envelope.
Variable cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated based
on the required capacity:
6.3.11 Screw compressors
TCYCLE= TON /% Request
pRack pR300 can manage up to two screw compressors, with control in
stages or continuous control (only the first compressor with continuous
control, used as modulation device for the suction line), which can be a
generic device or pre-configured in accordance with the most common
devices supplied by the main manufacturers. Advanced functions are
also available, for example envelope control, described further on. The
parameters relating to screw compressors can be set in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f. Screw compressors are fitted with up to 4 capacity control valves
(hereinafter V1, V2, V3, V4), which can have 4 types of behaviour:
• X à OFF: the valve is closed;
• O à ON: the valve is open;
• I à Intermittent: the valve is opened/closed intermittently
(approximately every 10-15s);
• P à Pulsating: the valve is opened/closed alternately with very rapid
opening/closing times (approximately every 1-2 s).
Optimised cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated based
on the required capacity for capacities less than 17 %, after which the
cycle time is set to 12 s and the ON time varies. In essence, this mode is a
combination of the previous two. This guarantees the maximum possible
COP and control rate (obtained with the 12 s cycle time) and the maximum
control range (starting from 10 %).
Note:
• the minimum capacity that can be delivered by Digital Scroll™
compressors is Minimum ON time/Maximum cycle time = 2/30 = 6.7
%, which also depends on the selected control mode (for example, in
the first case shown in the figure the minimum capacity delivered is
Minimum ON time/Cycle time = 2/15 = 13%).
• if high pressure prevention is enabled with activation/deactivation
Important: pulsating valves must be associated with an SSR relay
output, to avoid damage.
of the devices, the Digital Scroll™ compressor delivers the minimum
possible capacity.
V1, V2, V3 and V4 can be managed to obtain stage or continuous
compressor control.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
38
ENG
Stage control
For the control in stages, normally involving four load stages, 25, 50, 75,
100 %, a table needs to be created that shows the behaviour of each valve
in the different conditions (starting, 25 %, 50 %, 75 %, 100 %). The figure
shows one possible example:
Envelope
For screw compressors, pRack pR300 can manage control of the envelope,
which can either be pre-set or defined by the user. pRack pR300 accepts the
envelope control settings for the Bitzer CSH series compressors, and these
simply need to be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g. For all other series
of compressors, the envelope can be managed by enabling and setting all
the related parameters in main menu branch C.a.g.
The following parameters need to be set in order to manage the envelope:
• Definition of the points (maximum 30)
• Definition of the zone (maximum 12). Each zone can be made up of
one or more polygons (total maximum 14, which must be closed and
convex)
• Definition of the behaviour of the compressor in the different zones
(capacity and duration)
If intermittent valves are used, the cycle time also needs to be set.
Note: normally operation at minimum capacity (25 %) is only
possible for a limited time, after which the compressor must switch
to the next stage. This function can be enabled and the corresponding
time can be set.
The meaning of the parameters is shown in the figure:
Discharge pressure
P1
P2
P3
(Pol. 2)
Continuous control
For continuous control, a table needs to be created that shows the
behaviour of each valve in the different conditions (start/stop, increase,
decrease, standby). The figure shows one possible example:
Zone 2
P4
(Pol. 3)
Zone 1
(Pol. 1)
P5
P6
P7
P8
Suction pressure
Fig. 6.r
pRack pR300 can also manage the variation in the envelope as the capacity
delivered changes, for example in the case of variation in frequency for
inverter-driven compressors.
If intermittent/pulsating valves are used, the cycle time also needs to be
set. Intermittent valves are opened/closed for 50 % of the set time, while
for pulsating valves the opening and closing time in theory depend on the
difference between the position of the slide and the capacity request. As
the position of the slide is generally not measurable, the variation in the
request is used to calculate the times for pulsating valves.
Note: for further details on configuration of the envelope, contact Carel.
6.3.12 Bitzer CRII modulating compressor
pR300 can manage a system fitted with CRII compressors. Up to 2 CRII
compressors can be configured (one on each line), each as first compressor
in L1 and L2. CRII is set as a capacity controlled piston compressor in which
the capacity steps can be activated/deactivated rapidly (5 s). In addition,
the CRII compressor can be ON with the capacity steps deactivated, so
as to respond faster to demand. This condition can remain active for a
maximum set time, after which capacity control will be activated, in turn
for a set time, to prevent compressor malfunctions. Compressor capacity
control is achieved by valves managed using SSR digital outputs, due to the
high number of cycles involved. Up to 3 capacity steps can be configured
on for each line (check the number of SSRs available).
Management by the pR300 of the different capacity steps allows complete
compressor capacity modulation.
Note: in continuous control, operation is normally only allowed for
an undetermined time when the capacity exceeds 50 %.
Starting procedure
pRack pR300 can manage the starting procedure for the screw compressors
by considering, following the star/delta or part-winding starting selected,
a further time of operation at minimum capacity, established by the
manufacturer or set to 60 s for generic compressors.
Once the starting procedure has ended, the compressor starts varying the
capacity according to the control request and if necessary considering the
duration at minimum capacity.
Series of compressors supported
pRack pR300 can manage several series of screw compressors made by the
main manufacturers, (Bitzer, Refcomp, Hanbell, …) which come with the
parameters described above already set.
If the maximum number of starts in one hour (equal to 8) is reached,
compressor capacity will be forced to 0% and the message “! 8-” will be
shown.
The models managed by pRack pR300 are shown in the table:
Capacity-control activation/deactivation
Capacity-control refers to the valve installed on the compressor. For 2
capacity steps, the compressor will be fitted with 2 valves and pRack needs
to manage 2 SSR digital outputs. Capacity-control activation/deactivation
refers then to energising/de-energising the valve, so as to open or close
the flow of refrigerant. A step is activated when demand exceeds the
corresponding capacity, vice-versa it is deactivated when demand falls to
the lower step. The following figure represents an example of a CRII with 2
capacity steps (50-100).
Manufacturer Model
Bitzer
CSH65…95, HS.53-4/64, HS.74, HS85
Hanbell
RC2-100/140/180, RC2-170/200…1520
134-S, 134-XS L1, 134-XS L2, SRS-S1XX…755, SRC-S785…985,
RefComp
SRC-XS L1, SRC-XS L2
Tab. 6.e
For manufacturers or series of compressors that are not supported, the
generic type can be used and the corresponding parameters set as
described previously..
The first steps is activated as soon as demand exceeds 50%, and the second
when reaching 100%. When demand falls, on the other hand, the second
step is deactivated as soon as this falls below 50%, and the first at 0%.
Note: for further details on the series of compressors supported and
the related pre-configured parameters, contact Carel.
39
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
If it is the last compressor active at that moment, after reaching 0% capacity
it will immediately shut down.
150
100
50
0
50
100
Rising (%)
Falling (%)
150
-50
Configuration
A system with CRII compressors can be configured directly from the
wizard. The following procedure shows the selection of a CRII compressor
with two capacity steps, 50%-100%:
Fig. 6.s
CRII modulation in neutral zone
The type of control can be selected between proportional-integral and
neutral zone. If choosing neutral zone control, CRII compressor modulation
can be enabled inside the zone. CRII modulation requires the definition of
a new band, comprising the set point and a differential called “Diff CRII”,
this band defined must fall inside the neutral zone.
CASE 1: suction pressure is inside the neutral zone and is increasing.
Starting from current capacity, at the moment when “min mod” is
exceeded, the compressor will activate the capacity steps until reaching
“max mod” at 100%.
CASE 2: suction pressure is inside the neutral zone and is decreasing.
Starting from current capacity, at the moment when “min mod” is
exceeded, the compressor will deactivate the capacity steps until reaching
“max mod” at 0%.
min mod.
Times
Min Ton, minimum ON time:
• 120 s up to 5.5kW
• 180 s up to 15kW
• 300 s above 15kW
max mod.
diff
CRII
diff
CRII
Min Toff, minimum OFF time:
• range [5 s … 999 s]
Psuct
diff NZ
Min start same compressor, minimum time between two consecutive
starts of the same compresso:
• range [ 5 s … 999 s]
diff NZ
Set point
Fig. 6.ap
Legenda:
® MIN mod. = actual capacity CRII
MAX mod. = 100% capacity
¬ MAX mod. = actual capacity CRII
MIN mod. = 0% of CRII
Total capacity doesn’t change
Max time with compressor on with load bypassed is the maximum time
in which the CRII compressor can remain active at 0% capacity after which
capacity control will be activated.
• up to 120 s
In both cases, in the grey area between the neutral zone thresholds and
the CRII differentials, total capacity does not change.
Note: when the suction pressure falls outside of the neutral zone,
the compressors are switched off in sequence, varying CRII capacity to
achieve correct modulation. The CRII compressor will go to 0% capacity
before another compressor is shut down, and can remain in this condition
for a set time, as long as there are other active compressors.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
40
ENG
CRII unloader delay is the delay on activation of capacity control.
• range [5 s … 999 s]
The following table highlights the cases in which the fan is activated with
reference to the default values, with 3 capacity steps:
Condensing
CRII % activation(*) Fan activation
pressure (Pcond)
Pcond<P1 (condi- OFF
Keep off or switch off after 0s + 20s
tion not allowed)
P1<=Pcond<P2 step1 ® 0%
Switch on
P2<=Pcond<P3 step1 ® 0%
Switch on
Pcond>=P3
step1 ® 0%
Switch on
P1<=Pcond<P2 0%
Keep on
P2<=Pcond<P3 0%
Keep on
Pcond>=P3
0%
Keep on
P1<=Pcond<P2 step2 ® step1
Keep off or check step1 switch off condition
P2<=Pcond<P3 step2 ® step1
Switch on
Pcond>=P3
step2 ® step1
Switch on
P1<=Pcond<P2 step1
Keep off or switch off after 60 s + 20s
P2<=Pcond<P3 step1
Switch on
Pcond>=P3
step1
Switch on
P1<=Pcond<P2 Step3 ® step2
Keep off or check step2 switch off condition
P2<=Pcond<P3 Step3 ® step2
Keep off or check step2 switch off condition
Pcond>=P3
Step3 ® step2
Switch on
P1<=Pcond<P2 step2
Keep off or switch off after 60 s + 20s
P2<=Pcond<P3 step2
Keep off or switch off after 180 s + 20s
Pcond>=P3
step2
Switch on
P1<=Pcond<P2 step3
Keep off or switch off after 60 s + 20s
P2<=Pcond<P3 step3
Keep off or switch off after 180 s + 20s
Pcond>=P3
step3
Switch on
Extra cooling fan
To prevent malfunctions of the CRII compressor due to high operating
temperature, pR300 can activate a fan installed on the compressor to
provide extra cooling. pR300 does not manage the CRII compressor
envelope. The extra cooling fan is activated based on two variables:
• Current CRII capacity
• Condensing pressure
with specific cases for the medium temperature and low temperature line.
Fan for medium temperature line
The following parameters need to be set to manage the fan:
• Condensing pressure threshold (default 16 bars)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure higher than threshold(default 180 s)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure lower than threshold(default 60 s)
• Shutdown delay (default 20 s)
6.4 Fans
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 condenser lines with up to 16 fans and
one speed modulation device each, applying common types of device
rotation and controlling both the starting mode and some accessory
functions. The modulation device may be an inverter or a phase fired
controller. The fan functions and related parameter settings are enabled
from main menu branch D.a/D.b. The functions are described in detail
below.
6.4.1
Control
pRack pR300 can manage - as described in paragraph 6.2 - proportional
band and Neutral zone control, by pressure or temperature. For details on
the control modes, see the corresponding paragraph, while below is the
description only of the features relating to the fans.
The following table highlights the cases in which the fan is activated with
reference to the default values:
Condensing
CRII % activation (*) Fan
pressure (Pcond)
Pcond >= 16bar 50% ® 0%
Switch on
Pcond < 16bar
50% ® 0%
Keep off or switch off after 0s + 20s
Pcond >= 16bar 0%
Keep on
Pcond < 16bar
0%
Keep off or switch off after 60 s + 20s
Pcond >= 16bar 50%
Keep off or switch off after 180 s + 20 s
Pcond < 16bar
50%
Keep off or switch off after 60 s + 20 s
Fan operation depending on the compressors
The operation of the fans can be bound to the operation of the compressors
by setting a parameter in main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b, in this case the
fans only start if at least one compressor is on. This setting is ignored if
the fans are controlled by a dedicated pRack pR300 board and the pLAN
network is disconnected.
Fan for low temperature line
The following parameters need to be set to manage the fan:
• Condensing pressure threshold P1 (default 7.5 bars) didepending on the
capacity step
• Condensing pressure threshold P2 (default 15 bars) didepending on the
capacity step
• Condensing pressure threshold P3 (default 19.5 bars) didepending on
the capacity step
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure higher than threshold(default
180 s)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure lower than threshold(default
60 s)
• Shutdown delay (default 20 s)
Fan operation with modulating device
If the fans are controlled by a modulating device, the meaning of the
parameters that associate the minimum and maximum values of the
device’s modulating output and the minimum and maximum capacity of
the modulating device on screens Dag02 and Dbg02 is illustrated in the
following examples.
Example 1: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 0 %, maximum 100 %.
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min capacity = 0 %
Min output
value = 0 V
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.t
41
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Example 2: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
If there is more than one inverter driven fan, as well as being able to
use an alarm digital input for each, it is assumed that the weight of the
modulating device is proportional to the number of fans, therefore the
first case is applied, as described in paragraph 6.3.3: fans all with the same
power and modulating device power variation range greater than or equal
to the capacity of the other devices.
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Example 1: 4 fans all controlled by the same inverter correspond to
1 fan with four times the power.
Min output
value = 0 V
Min capacity = 60 %
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Note: some fans can be excluded from the rotation, for example in
the winter; to do this use the split condenser function described in
paragraph 6.4.5.
Regulation
probe value
6.4.3
Fig. 6.u
Example 3: minimum modulating output value 2 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch D.a.g/D.b.g
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
If speed up is enabled, a start time can be set in which the fan speed is forced
to 100%. If the outside temperature sensor is used, moreover, a threshold
can be set (with reset differential) below which speed up is disabled, so as
to not drastically lower the condensing pressure at start-up.
Min capacity = 60 %
Note: speed up has lower priority than the Silencer function (see the
following paragraph for the details), therefore if the Silencer function
is active, this is disabled.
Min output
value = 2 V
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Fast start (speed up)
pRack pR300 can manage the fast start function (speed up), used to
overcome the initial inertia of the fans.
Regulation
probe value
6.4.4
Silencer
pRack pR300 can manage the Silencer function, used to limit fan speed at
certain times of the day or in specific conditions, enabled by digital input.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch D.a.g/D.b.g.
Enabling fan speed limitation from the digital input or based on time
bands is independent, consequently the speed is limited to the set value
when at least one of the two conditions is active.
Up to 4 activation bands can be set for each day of the week.
Fig. 6.aq
Cut-off
pRack pR300 manages a control cut-off for the fans; functions and related
parameter settings can be enabled from main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b.
The operating principle of the cut-off function is shown in the figure:
Regulation request
6.4.5
Max output
value
Split condenser
pRack pR300 can manage the possibility to exclude some fans from
operation, for example to reduce condenser operation in winter, using the
split condenser function.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch D.a.g/D.b.g.
Cut-Off value
of request
Cut-Off setpoint
Regulation setpoint
Differential
Differential
Split condenser can be used to exclude from rotation fans whose index is:
• even
• odd
• higher than a settable value
• lower than a settable value
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.v
A percentage of the control request and a cut-off set point can be set.
When the control request reaches the set cut-off value, this value is kept
constant until the control value falls below the cut-off set point, after
which it falls to 0 % and remains there until the request exceeds the cut-off
value again.
The function can be activated by:
• time bands (winter/summer seasons)
• digital input
• supervisor
• outside temperature (set threshold and differential)
6.4.2
• the split condenser function can be disabled by parameter if the high
Note:
Rotation
pressure prevention function is activated (see paragraph 8.3.3). If split
condenser is disabled due to activation of the high pressure prevention
function, it remains disabled for a set time, after which it is reactivated.
• split condenser cannot be enabled if there is a speed modulation device
that controls all the fans.
pRack pR300 can manage rotation of the fans, much in the same way as
described for the compressors, therefore:
• LIFO, FIFO, time, Custom rotation
• Management of a modulation device on each line
The substantial difference compared to the compressors concerns the
possibility to manage different capacities and load stages, which are
obviously not featured for the fans. In addition, pRack pR300 can specially
manage inverter driven fans. In fact, a multiple number of inverter driven
fans can be set.
If there is more than one fan, however the number of inverter driven fans
is set to 1, the fans are started and stopped at the same time, and the fans
will always all be at the same power.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
42
ENG
6.4.6
Compensation from analogue input only applies to the suction pressure set
point and can be enabled separately. If compensation from analogue input is
enabled, a offset that is linearly variable to the value read by a dedicated probe
can be applied to the suction pressure set point, as shown in the figure.
Manual operation
pRack pR300 can also manage the same three manual operating modes
for the fans as described for the compressors:
• Enabling
• Manual management
• Output test
Offset
Enabling is managed in main menu branch D.a.f/D.b.f., while manual
management and the output test can be activated in main menu branch B.b or
B.c. For the detailed description of the three modes, see paragraph 6.3.9.
Offset max
6.4.7
Offset min
Alarms
Probe value
pRack pR300 can manage both a common alarm for the fans and separate
alarms for each fan. When the common alarm is active the alarm is
signalled, but no fan is stopped, while for separate alarms the fan that the
alarm refers to is stopped. For details on the fan alarms, see Chapter 8.
Lower value
6.5.2
Floating suction pressure set point
For the suction line, the floating set point is managed by the supervisor.
The suction pressure set point set by the user is changed by the supervisor
in range between a settable minimum and maximum. The operation is
illustrated in the following figure:
6.5 Energy saving
pRack pR300 can activate energy saving functions by adjusting the suction
and condensing pressure set points. The suction and condensing pressure
set points can be applied with two different offsets, one for the closing
period and one for the winter period, activated by:
• Digital input
• Time band
• Supervisor
Floating setpoint
Max
Real variation
In addition, the suction pressure set point can be modified from analogue
input, applying a linearly variable offset based on the value read by a probe.
As well as set point compensation from digital input, scheduler, supervisor
or analogue input, two further energy saving functions are available,
floating suction and condensing pressure set point. The functions can be
enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch C.a.d/C.b.d
and D.a.d/D.b.d.
6.5.1
Upper value
Fig. 6.x
Max variation
Min
time
Sampling time
Set point compensation
Fig. 6.y
Compensation from digital input, scheduler or supervisor is similar for the
suction and condensing pressure set points, consequently the following
description applies to both.
The set point is calculated by the supervisor and acquired by the pRack pR300
controller at set intervals, the maximum variation allowed for the set point
in each sampling period can also be set; if the value acquired differs from
the previous value by more than the max. variation allowed, the variation
is limited to the maximum value. If the supervisor is disconnected, after 10
min. (fixed) the pRack pR300 controller starts decreasing the set point with
variations equal to the maximum variation allowed each sampling period,
until reaching the min. set point allowed with floating suction pressure.
Two different offsets can be defined, which apply to:
• Closing periods, defined by the scheduler, activation of a digital input
or supervisor
• Winter period, defined by the scheduler
The two offsets add to the set point defined by the user when the
corresponding condition is active.
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and maximum
limits for the floating set point.
Example 1: closing offset 0.3 barg, winter offset 0.2 barg, suction
pressure compensation from scheduler and from digital input
activated. When the digital input is activated, for example with a day/night
function, 0.3 barg is added to the operating set point, and when the winter
period is in progress a further 0.2 barg is added. The operation can be
schematised in the following figure:
6.5.3
Floating condensing pressure set point
For the condenser line, the floating set point is based on the outside
temperature. The floating condensing pressure set point is achieved by
adding a constant programmable value to the outside temperature and
limiting the resulting value between a settable minimum and maximum,
as shown in the figure:
Digital Input
ex.: day/night
Summer/Winter
Floating setpoint
Max
Setpoint
User setpoint +0,5 barg
offset
time
Min
Fig. 6.w
external temperature
Note: the same digital input is used for set point compensation on
each line, so if suction and condensing pressure set point
compensation is activated by digital input, both compensation functions
are active at the same time.
time
Fig. 6.z
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and maximum
limits for the floating set point.
43
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Line oil management
pRack pR300 features an alarm digital input for each line; this is with Signal
only, that is, has no effect on the operation of the devices. For details on
this alarm see chapter 8. For all types of compressors, a common oil cooler
can be managed for each line; the operation of this is Similar to the cooler
for each individual compressor described previously.
6.6 Accessory functions
pRack pR300 can manage several accessory functions. Of these, the
economizer and liquid injection have already been described in paragraph
6.3 on compressor operation, while the others are described below.
6.6.1
Oil management
Note: for screw compressors, if common cooling is selected, cooling
for each compressor cannot be activated.
pRack pR300 features oil management for the individual compressors, as
well as common management for each line:
• Individual compressor: oil alarm, high oil temperature, and, for screw
compressors only, oil warning, oil cooling and oil level
• Line: common oil alarm, high oil temperature warning, oil cooling
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch E.a.a/E.a.b or C.a.e/C.b.e (for the individual compressor alarms).
6.6.2
Subcooling
pRack pR300 can control subcooling in two different ways:
• with the condensing temperature and the liquid temperature
• with the liquid temperature only
In the first case, subcooling is calculated as the difference between the
condensing temperature (obtained by converting the condensing
pressure) and the liquid temperature measured after the exchanger.
The corresponding output is activated below a set threshold, with fixed
differential.
Individual compressor oil management
For the description of the oil alarm and warning corresponding to the
individual compressor see Chapter 8. For screw compressors, an oil cooler
can be managed for each compressor, made up of a heat exchanger, a
fan and 1 or 2 pumps. The operation of the cooler varies according to the
setting of the output, which may be:
• Analogue: one pump only
• Digital: 1 or 2 pumps
Digital output
The control probe is the compressor oil temperature probe, and the
following need to be set: set point, differential and, for 2 pumps only, an
activation delay for the second pump. The operation of the cooler when
using an analogue output is shown in the figure:
1°C/°F
Threshold
Fig. 6.ac
Fan
Oil cooler 0...10 V
Tcond. - Tliq.
In the second case, the output is active for liquid temperature values
greater than a threshold, with fixed differential.
Digital output
Pump
Differential
Differential
1°C/°F
Oil temperature
Threshold
Setpoint
Fig. 6.ad
The subcooling function can be enabled and the related parameters set in
main menu branch E.b.a/E.b.b.
Fig. 6.aa
If a digital output and just one pump is used, the fan and the pump are
activated/deactivated at the same time:
Note: the subcooling func. is active when at least one compressor is on.
6.6.3
Oil cooler
0...10 V
Differential
Heat recovery
pRack pR300 can manage heat recovery for types of system with heat
recovery in series with the main condenser.
Heat recovery can be activated by:
• Probe
• Time bands
• Supervisor
Fan/Pump
Differential
Tliq.
Oil temperature
Setpoint
The heat recovery function can be enabled and the related parameters set
in main menu branch E.e.a/E.e.b.
A digital input is managed that acts as a trigger for activating the function.
When the digital input is not active, heat recovery is not operating, while
when the digital input is active heat recovery is operating when at least
one of the other conditions is true, as shown in the figure:
Fig. 6.ab
If a digital output and two pumps are used, the operation of the fan and
the first pump is Similar to the previous case, while the second pump
is activated when the oil temperature is greater than the set point +
differential for a time at least equal to the delay, and is deactivated when
the oil temperature falls back below the set point minus the differential.
The oil level can be managed for the first 6 compressors on each suction
line. If a compressor alarm is configured as an oil alarm, this alarm can
be associated with oil level management, enabling the function and
setting the compressor alarm number to be used: when the digital input
associated with the alarm is activated (this thus Signals the low oil level),
a valve is activated with intermittent operation to restore the level, with
opening and closing times that can be set. If after a set time, the digital
input is still active, that is, the minimum level has not been reached, pRack
pR300 Signals an alarm and stops the compressor.
Digital Input
Probe
Scheduler
Supervisor
Heat reclaim
Fig. 6.ae
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
44
ENG
The generic functions can be enabled and the related parameters set in
main menu branch E.f. To be able to use the free inputs, these must be
configured as generic probes from A to E (analogue inputs) and generic
inputs from F to J (digital inputs), consequently a maximum of 5 analogue
and 5 digital inputs can be used. After having configured the generic
probes, the associated variables can be used as control variables and the
digital inputs as enabling variables.
If the digital input is not configured, only the other conditions are taken into
consideration. When the heat recovery function is active, a digital output
is activated to trigger the pump and a digital or analogue output for an
On/Off or modulating 3-way valve. For activation by probe, the operation
of the On/Off or modulating 3-way valve and the pump is shown in the
figure, where the temperature considered is the heat recovery exchanger
outlet temperature:
Heat reclaim by probe
Pump and ON/OFF valve
As well as the generic probes and inputs, pRack pR300 software internal
variables can be used, depending on the system configuration. Some
examples are, for analogue variables:
• Suction pressure
• Condensing pressure
• Saturated suction temperature
• Saturated condensing temperature
• Suction temperature
• Discharge temperature
• % of compressors active
• % of fans active
• Superheat
• Subcooling
• Liquid temperature,
• % compressor request
• % fan requesti
Modulating valve
Differential
Differential
Setpoint
Outlet temperature
(Refrigerant)
Fig. 6.af
If the probe is not working, pRack pR300 considers the other conditions,
without Signalling further alarms in addition to the probe alarm. As regards
activation from time bands, heat recovery does not consider the operating
seasons, and links can be set to special days and closing periods so that
heat recovery is only active based on the daily bands set.
And for the digital variables:
• High suction pressure alarm
• Low suction pressure alarm
• High condensing pressure alarm
• Sign of life
• Prevent active
Note:
• a settable bottom limit is available for the condensing pressure, below
which heat recovery is deactivated.
Each generic function can be associated with a unit of measure and a
description. Below is a description of the operation of four types of generic
functions.
• condensing pressure set point compensation can be disabled when
heat recovery is active..
Heat recovery as the first stage in high pressure prevention
Heat recovery can be used to prevent high condensing pressure. The
parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the
main menu, after having enabled the heat recovery function. For details
on operation of the prevent function, see paragraph 8.3.3. Heat recovery
operation as the first stage in high pressure prevention is shown in the figure:
Heat reclaim
For both the “Stage” and “Modulating” generic functions, it is possible to
choose whether to set the generic function on one or two distinct control
variables. In the latter case, it is possible to link the two control variables by
enabling one of the following operations between them:
• DIFFERENCE = Var1 – Var2 (default)
• AVERAGE = (Var1+Var2)/2
• SUM = Var1 + Var2
• RATIO = Var1 / Var2 (e.g. compression ratio = Pdisch_L1 – Psuct_L1)
Prevent
The following options are therefore now available:
• Control on a single variable:
Diff.
Diff.
Diff.
Diff.
Cond. Press.
Offset
Heat reclaim activation
Prevent threshold
Fig. 6.ag
The function must be enabled and an offset must be set in relation to
prevent threshold, while the differential is the same set for the prevent
function.
6.6.4
Generic functions
pRack pR300 can use the free inputs /outputs and certain internal variables
for generic functions.
Important: The generic functions are available on pRack pR300
boards with pLAN addresses from 1 to 4, that is, on all boards that
manage a suction or condensing line, nonetheless only the parameters
corresponding to the functions managed by boards 1 and 2 are sent to the
supervisory system.
The following generic functions are available for each board:
• 5 stages
• 2 modulations
• 2 alarms
• 1 scheduler
45
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
• Control on two variables:
be set. See chapter 8 for details on the alarms. One example of using the
generic stage functions may be activation of the fans on the room units
based on the temperature.
Modulation
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 modulation functions, with either direct
or reverse operation. In both cases, a set point and a differential can be set;
the operation of the corresponding output is shown in the figure for direct
mode, with the cut-off function also enabled:
Direct modulation
MAX
MIN
(Cut-off
Value)
Note that the second control variable can be selected after having
configured the first. If both variables are configured, and then the first one
is removed, the second is automatically reset.
Hyster.
Setpoint
Regulation variable
Differential
Fig. 6.ai
Note: the control variables selected must be dimensionally coherent.
This means that operations are only permitted between uniform variables
(e.g. pressure with pressure, temperature with temperature, etc.). If the
control identifies an inconsistency between the two variables, the second
control variable is automatically reset (see the figures below).
If an enabling variable has been set, the corresponding output is active if
the enabling is also active. For each modulation, a high alarm threshold
and a low alarm threshold can be set, and are absolute. For each alarm,
the activation delay and priority can be set. See chapter 8 for details on the
alarms. For modulation a minimum and maximum value can also be set
for the output, and the cut-off function can be enabled, with operation as
shown in the previous figure.
For the “Modulating” generic functions, in addition to the PROPORTIONAL
setting, the PID (proportional + integral + derivative) setting has also been
introduced (from version 4.1.0).
Stages
pRack pR300 can manage up to 5 stage functions, with either direct or
reverse operation. In both cases, a set point and a differential can be set; the
operation of the corresponding output is shown in the figure for both cases:
Direct stage
Diff.
Diff.
PID control is available in both “direct” and “reverse” mode. In the same way
as for proportional control:
• in direct mode, the analogue output increases as the value of the
control variable increases;
• In reverse mode, the analogue output increases as the value of the
control variable decreases.
Regulation variable
Setpoint
Once PID control has been selected, in addition to the proportional gain
(defined by the differential), the integral and derivative times can also be
set (see the figure below).
Reverse stage
Diff.
Diff.
Regulation variable
Setpoint
Fig. 6.ah
If an enabling variable has been set, the corresponding output is active if
the enabling is also active.
For each stage, a high alarm threshold and a low alarm threshold can be
set, and are absolute. For each alarm, the activation delay and priority can
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
46
ENG
The four DSS functions can be enabled independently and are useful for
booster or CO2 cascade system configurations:
Alarms
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 alarm functions, with settable digital
variable to be monitored, activation delay, priority and description. Each
generic function can be associated with a digital output for the activation
of external devices when the alarm is activated. One example of using the
generic alarm functions involves detecting gas leaks.
Scheduler
pRack pR300 can manager a generic scheduler that activates a digital output
at certain time bands. Up to 4 daily time bands can be set for each day of
the week, in addition operation of the generic scheduler can be linked to the
common scheduler, and consequently the output activated based on:
• summer/winter
• up to 5 closing periods
• up to 10 special days
See paragraph 6.7.2 for details on the time bands.
6.6.5
P
T
P
T
Fig. 6.aj
ChillBooster
pRack pR300 can control the Carel ChillBooster, device used for evaporative
cooling of the air that flows through the condenser. ChillBooster can
be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.g.
ChillBooster is activated when two conditions exist:
• the outside temperature exceeds a set threshold
• the fan control request is at the maximum for at least a settable number
of minutes
The maximum request time starts counting again whenever the request
decreases, therefore the request must remain at the maximum for at least
the set time. Activation ends when the request falls below a set threshold.
pRack pR300 can manage an alarm digital input from ChillBooster, the
effect of which is to deactivate the device. For details see Chapter 8. As the
number of operating hours of ChillBooster is critical as regards formation
of scale on the condenser, pRack pR300 can manage the operating hour
threshold, which should be set to 200 hours.
P
T
P
T
P
T
Fig. 6.ak
Hygiene procedure
To avoid water stagnation in the pipes, a hygiene procedure can be
enabled that activates ChillBooster every day for a set time, if the outside
temperature is greater than a threshold.
Important: in the pRack pR300 software assumes that the medium
temperature line is line L1, while the low temperature line is line L2.
DSS can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch
E.h.
Note: if the outside temperature probe is not configured or is
configured but is not working, ChillBooster operates based solely on the
control request, and the hygiene procedure can still be activated.
Disable simultaneous starts
Disabling simultaneous compressor starts may be useful for all
system configurations with two separate lines and in cascade system
configurations. The function to avoid simultaneous starts can be enabled,
setting a delay time between the starts of compressors on different lines.
The only difference between probe not configured and probe not working
concerns the ChillBooster operating without temperature probe alarm,
which is only generated when the probe is configured but not working.
ChillBooster as the first stage in high pressure prevention
ChillBooster can be used to prevent high condensing pressure.
Forcing the medium temperature line
Forcing the medium temperature line may be useful for cascade system
configurations and involves, once enabled, forcing at least one compressor
on medium temperature line L1 to start at minimum capacity, if at least
one compressor on low temperature line L2 is running. This means that
before the low temperature line starts, the DSS function forces at least
one of the compressors on medium temperature line L1 to start. The low
temperature line L2 thus has higher priority than the control request for
medium temperature line L1.
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b in
the main menu, after having enabled the ChillBooster function.
For details on the prevent function see paragraph 8.3.3.
Operation of ChillBooster as the first stage in high pressure prevention is
Similar to the heat recovery function described in paragraph 6.6.3.
The function must be enabled and an offset must be set in relation to the
prevent threshold, while the differential is the same as set for the prevent
function.
6.6.6
Shutdown the low temperature line
The low temperature line is shutdown by the DSS function if a serious
alarm is activated on the medium temperature line, or, in general, if the
medium temperature line is OFF.
Double line synchronisation (DSS)
pRack pR300 can manage, for two line configurations, several
synchronisation functions between the two lines:
• Disable simultaneous compressors starts
• Force the medium temperature line on if the low temperature line is
activated
• Shutdown the low temperature line if the medium temperature line has
a serious alarm
• Enable pump-down medium temperature line
Enable pump-down medium temperature line
During normal compressor rack operation, when at least one compressor
on the low temperature line is running, the medium temperature
compressor control will enable pump-down. If there is demand on the low
temperature line, the minimum capacity step for medium temperature line
will be guaranteed if MT suction pressure is not lower the set threshold.
Note: in the event of pLAN network faults, DSS is disabled.
47
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
6.6.7
COMMON varying cooling capacity
Pre-positioning/start control: if switching from standby to control, before
actual control starts the valve is moved to a specific initial position. The prepositioning time is the time in which the valve is kept in a fixed position,
according to the parameter “Valve opening at start-up”.
Electronic valve synchronisation (EVS)
For configuration of the DRIVER or DRIVERS, where there are two heat
exchangers, access OTHER FUNCTIONS®EVS; iwhich comprises the
following submenus:
a. Temperature control
b. Manual management
c. I/O status
d. Control
e. Valve configuration
f. Driver configuration
Temp. control:
Manual management:
I/O status:
Control:
Valve configuration:
Driver configuration:
Parameter/Description
CONTROL
Pre-positioning time
Valve opening at start-up
(evaporator /valve capacity ratio)
Def.
Min.
Max.
UOM
6
50
0
0
18000
100
s
%
Tab. 6.g
Information relating superheat is shown
The valve can be moved to a certain number of steps
Display and configuration of the probes connected
to the 4 analogue inputs on the driver
Valve opening, PID parameters, alarm limits/delays
Minimum/maximum number of steps, nominal
frequencies
Enable driver, defaults
The valve opening parameter should be set based on the ratio between
rated evaporator and valve cooling capacity (e.g. rated evaporator cooling
capacity: 3 kW, rated valve cooling capacity: 10 kW, valve opening = 3/10
= 33%).
• If 100% capacity is required: Opening (%)= (Valve opening at start-up);
• If capacity required is less than 100% (capacity control): Opening (%)=
(Valve opening at start-up) • (Current unit cooling capacity), where the
current unit cooling capacity is sent to the driver via pLAN by the pCO
controller. For stand-alone drivers this is always equal to 100%.
For branches a, b, c, d, e, f refer directly to the parameter table in chapter
7, while for a more detailed explanation of the DRIVER EVD EVO functions,
see the technical manual: +0300005EN
Note: one DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used,
this will be managed as a single driver; also the connection must be made
on the first valve (EXV1-J27 in the case of built-in drivers).
Note:
• this procedure is used to anticipate valve movement and bring it much
closer to working position immediately after the unit is powered on;
• if there are problems with liquid return after the start of the refrigeration
Enable driver:
The driver can be enabled in the configuration menu (E.i.f ) and once
enabled, the number of valves and corresponding addresses of the two
drivers can be entered.
unit, or there are frequent unit on-off cycles, valve opening at start-up
must be decreased. If there are low pressure problems after starting the
refrigeration unit, the valve opening must be increased.
Positioning (change cooling capacity)
In practice, the valve is re-positioned starting from the current position
in proportion to how much the unit cooling capacity has increased or
decreased, in percentage terms. On reaching the calculated position,
irrespective of how long it takes (variable according to the type of valve
and the actual position), there will be a constant 5 second delay, after
which control resumes.
Note: if it is not possible to have the information on the change in
unit cooling capacity, this will be always be considered as operating at
100% and therefore the procedure will never be used. In this case, the PID
control needs to be more reactive (see Control), so as to respond promptly
to variations in load that are not communicated to the driver.
Note:
• make sure that Fieldbus driver management reflects the logic of the
generic functions, i.e. up to 2 drivers per suction line can be enabled,
with a limit of 2 drivers per board in the pLAN (L1&L2 on single board,
maximum 2 drivers);
• on the supervisor, L1, L2 management on separate boards requires the
use of two single line templates;
• a Fieldbus driver cannot be connected to boards 3 and 4 in pLAN.
ON
A
OFF
Screen Eif02 contains the commands to set the defaults for the Driver, after
which the parameters are updated (pRack®Driver), ); in addition, the line
of compressors used for the pre-positioning logic can be selected
t
ON
C
OFF
t
ON
NP
OFF
t
ON
R
OFF
t
T3
Note:
• Control based on line 1 is only possible on pLAN board with address 1.
Fig. 6.ar
While control based on the compressors on line 2 is only possible on
boards where the low temperature compressors are configured (pLAN
1 for double suction on single board and pLAN2 for double suction on
separate boards);
• important, if the line is not managed o the current board, the Driver
function is disabled.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
W
Legenda:
A
C
NP
R
48
Control request
Change in capacity
Re-positioning
Control
T3
W
t
Re-positioning time
Wait
Time
ENG
6.6.8
Unit of measure
pRack pR300 can manage two units of measure, the international system
and Imperial.
Regulation request
Max
Note: the temperature and pressure units of measure can be
changed from °C, barg to °F, psig only during start-up; mixed
configurations are not allowed, for example °F and barg.
offset
digital input
Min
6.6.9
Sign of life
pRack pR300 can manage a digital output acting as a sign of life, activated
when pRack pR300 is powered up.
This output remains active while the controller is working correctly and
highlights any hardware faults.
The Signal can be configured in main menu branch B.a.c.
time
Fig. 6.am
• By suitably setting this parameter based on system configuration,
one compressor can be shut down; for example if there are three
compressors, by setting the decrease to 33%, activation of the input
stops one of the three compressors. Compressor shutdown and restart
respect the safety times.
6.6.10 Liquid non-return
pRack pR300 can manage a digital output with the meaning of liquid nonreturn. This normally active output is deactivated when all the compressors
are off and no compressor can be started due to alarms or time settings,
despite the control request, or when the unit is OFF. As soon as at least
one compressor is enabled to start, the output is deactivated, allowing
management of a liquid non-return valve. The function can be configured
in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g.
The digital inputs configured are common to both lines, while for each line
a different action can be associated with the same digital input.
In any case, the previous actions do not interfere with the pRack pR300 safety
features, which always have priority over the actions set from digital input.
pRack pR300 can interact with the pLoads controller, which manages
power using a load cut-off function.
Moreover, a suction pressure safety threshold has been introduced,
therefore the actions associated with the inputs are only enabled if the
pressure does not exceed this threshold (settable by parameter). After
the pLoads action has been disabled, it is necessary that the suction
pressure returns below the safety threshold for a setted time (higher than
30 s), before restoring the interaction between the two devices, so to the
regulation can be stabilize.
Interaction can be enabled and the related parameters set from main
menu branch C.a.d and C.b.d.
6.6.12 Power consumption
6.6.11 Interaction with pLoads
pRack pR300 can calculate power consumption for the current day and the
previous day. The calculation can be enabled and the related parameters
set from main menu branch C.a.d and C.b.d.
To calculate power consumption, the current draw is measured via an
analogue input, while the type of load, rated voltage and displacement
can be set by parameter. The calculation starts at 00:00 every day and
continues until 24:00, when the value from the previous day is overwritten
with the new calculated value. The supervisory system can use the two
values, current day’s consumption and previous day’s consumption, for
power consumption analysis.
Interaction between pRack pR300 and pLoads uses digital inputs or the
supervisor. The digital inputs have higher priority, therefore if a digital input
is not active, the corresponding action is not produced even if requested
by the supervisor.
Two of the free digital inputs on pRack pR300 can be configured for
connection to two pLoads outputs, with each input being assigned one
of the following actions:
• No action. Activation of the digital input has no influence on control.
• Capacity limited to the current value. Activation of the digital input limits
the maximum control request; capacity can be reduced from this value
by the controller, but cannot exceed the current value at the moment
the digital input was activated for the entire time it remains active, as
shown in the figure:
6.7 Settings
6.7.1
Regulation request
Clock
pRack pR300 features an internal clock with backup battery that keeps the
time and date for all related functions (see Chapter 2 for details relating to
the hardware).
Limit
The date on pRack pR300 can be set as follows:
• day, month, year (dd/mm/yy)
• month, day, year (mm/dd/yy)
• year, month, day (yy/mm/dd)
The current date and time can be set, the day of the week corresponding
to set date displayed, plus changeover to daylight saving can be enabled
by setting the changeover date and the deviation.
Digital input
time
The related parameters can be set during start-up or in main menu branch
F.a.
Fig. 6.al
• Capacity limited to a % value, settable by parameter. As in the previous
case, the control request is limited at the top end, however to a fixed
value set by parameter.
• Decrease capacity by a % value, settable by parameter. Activation of
the digital input reduces the control request by a fixed value set by
parameter, as shown in the figure:
Note: the date and time are managed on pRack boards with
addresses 1 and 2; on power-up and whenever the pLAN network is
reconnected, the software on pRack synchronises the settings on board 2,
sending the date and time set on board 1.
If the clock card is not operating, an alarm is generated and the functions
relating to the time bands described in the following paragraph are not
available.
49
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
6.7.2
Time bands
6.8.2
pRack pR300 allows the operating seasons, the closing periods and
weekends to only be set once, and consequently these are common to all
the system functions.
The values pre-set by Carel can be installed at any time, restoring the pRack
pR300 default settings, and requiring the startup procedure described in
Chapter 4 to be repeated.
As well as these settings, each function can be associated with a weekly
scheduler, setting up to 4 different daily activation bands for each day
of the week. For each time band, the start and end time can be set and
settings made can be copied to the others days of the week.
Important: the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the
pRack pR300 permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible
operation; nonetheless, the user settings can still be restored if these have
already been saved. Given that pRack pR300, following the installation of
the Carel default values requires the startup procedure to be repeated,
select the first pre-configuration and then restore the user defaults.
The priority of the schedulers, from lowest to highest, is:
• weekly scheduler
• closing periods
• special days
Note: to complete a new configuration procedure as described in
Chapter 4, first restore the Carel default values.
For example, if the weekly scheduler requires activation of a function,
yet a closing period is in progress, and requires deactivation of the same
function, then the function is deactivated. The following functions allow
the setting of time bands:
• Split-condenser: the function is active only based on the operating
seasons, and consequently special days, closing periods and daily time
bands are ignored.
• Silencer: the function is only active with daily time bands, there is no link
to operating seasons, special days and closing periods
• Heat recovery: the function is active with daily time bands, special days
and closing periods, no link to operating seasons. The link to the general
scheduler can be disabled, considering the time bands only.
• Set point compensation: active with operating seasons, special days,
closing periods and daily time bands (two different offsets).
• Generic functions: the generic scheduling function is active with the
operating seasons, special days, closing periods and daily time bands.
Operation of the generic functions can be separated from the generic
scheduler, considering the daily time bands only.
For details on the functions that use time bands, see the corresponding
paragraphs.
6.8 Managing the default values
pRack pR300 can manage two different sets of default values:
• user defaults
• Carel defaults
The two functions can be activated in main menu branch I.d.
Important: after having reset the default values, the pRack pR300
board need to be switched off and on again.
6.8.1
Saving and resetting the user default values
pRack pR300 can save the exact configuration set by the user inside the
instrument, allowing it to be recalled at any time.
All the set values are saved, therefore loading user defaults restores the
exact same conditions that the pRack pR300 controller was in when the
data were saved.
Note: only one user default configuration can be saved, therefore
when the data is next saved, this overwrites the previous data.
Important:
• the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the pRack pR300
permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible operation;
• the user values cannot be reset after updating the software on the
pRack pR300, nonetheless see Chapter 10 for details on how to save the
parameters for versions different of the software.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Resetting the Carel default values
The Carel default values are shown in the Parameters table in Chapter 7.
50
ENG
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
Below is the table of the parameters that can be displayed on the
terminal. The values indicated with ‘---‘ are not Significant or are not
set, while the values indicated with ‘…’ may vary according to the
configuration, with the possible options visible on the user terminal.
A row of ‘…’ means that there are a series of parameters Similar to the
previous ones.
Legenda:
“Mask index”: indicates the unique address of each screen and
consequently the path needed to reach the parameters available on this
screen; for example, to reach the parameters corresponding to the suction
pressure probe with mask index Bab01, proceed as follows:
Main menù
Mask index
Main screen
Main screen (display
only)
Secondary screen
(display only)
Note: Not all the screens and parameters shown in the table are
always visible or can be set, the screens and parameters that are visible or
can be set depend on the configuration and the access level.
B.In./Out.èa.Statusèb.Analog.in.
Description on terminal
Description
Default UOM
Values
----L1-Suction
L1-Condenser
L1-SHeat
L1-Suct. temp.
L1-Dis. temp.
L1-Auxiliary
L2-Suction
L2-Condenser
L2-SHeat
L2-Suct. temp.
L2-Dis. temp.
L2-Auxiliary
EVD1-Condenser
EVD2-Condenser
---
Hours and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Superheat (configurable, line 1)
Suction temperature (configurable, line 1)
Discharge temperature (configurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Superheat (configurable, line 2)
Suction temperature (configurable, line 2)
Discharge temperature (configurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable on Driver 1, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable on Driver 2, line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
…
…
-------------------------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
------------------L1-Suction
L1-Condenser
L1-SHeat
L1-Suct. temp.
L1-Dis. temp.
L1-Auxiliary
L2-Suction
L2-Condenser
L2-SHeat
L2-Suct. temp.
L2-Dis. temp.
L2-Auxiliary
EVD1-Condenser
EVD2-Condenser
---
Number of compressors on line 1(with unit ON, configurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of compressors on line 2(with unit ON, configurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of fans on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of fans on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
Hours and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Superheat (configurable, line 1)
Suction temperature (configurable, line 1)
Discharge temperature (configurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (configurable, line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Superheat (configurable, line 2)
Suction temperature (configurable, line 2)
Discharge temperature (configurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (configurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable on Driver 1, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (configurable on Driver 2, line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
----------------…
…
-------------------------------
--%
--%
--%
--%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
-----------------
Number of compressors on line 1(with unit ON, configurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of compressors on line 2(with unit ON, configurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of fans on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, configurable)
Number of fans on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, configurable)
-----------------
--%
--%
--%
--%
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Unit OFF from Alarm
Unit OFF from blackout
Unit OFF from supervisor
Unit OFF from default
Unit OFF from digital IN
Unit OFF from keypad
Unit OFF manual mode
0…12
0…100
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
0…16
0…100
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Unit OFF from Alarm
Unit OFF from blackout
Unit OFF from supervisor
Unit OFF from default
Unit OFF from digital IN
Unit OFF from keypad
Unit OFF manual mode
0…12
0…100
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
0…16
0…100
51
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
Suction pressure (line 1)
Saturated suction temperature (line 1)
Effective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control differential for pressure control (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 1)
Saturated suction temperature (line 1)
Effective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control differential for temperature control (line 1)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for suction line (line 1)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 1)
----… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
-----
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
----…
s
%
…
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
0…29
ON / OFF
…
…
…
0…29
ON / OFF
Discharge temperature
Cap.reduction
Oil sump temp.
Oil status
Neutral
zone
Effective suction pressure set point (with compensation applied, line 1)
… (**)
Time remaining to next compressor start (line 1)
--Capacity delivered by compressor 1 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means --that some form of compressor capacity override is active, e.g. times, alarms,
start-up procedure)
…
…
Capacity delivered by compressor 12 (line 1)
--Suction temperature (line 1)
--Superheat (line 1)
--Discharge temperature, compressor 1 (line 1)
--…
…
Discharge temperature, compressor 6 (line 1)
--Number of digital output associated and status of liquid injection/
--economizer (*) compressor 1 (line 1)
…
…
Number of digital output associated and status of liquid injection/
--economizer (*) compressor 6 (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor discharge temperature (line 1)
--Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity reduction in progress (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil sump temperature (line 1)
--Digital ScrollTM compressor oil dilution status (line 1)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop Increas Operating
Decrease
Timings
Standby
Alarms
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…32000
0…100
…
Status
Digital ScrollTM compressor operating status (line 1)
---
---
Countdown
Compr.
Digital ScrollTM compressor time count (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor status (line 1)
-----
s
---
Valve
Digital ScrollTM valve status(line 1)
---
---
Requested cap.
Current capac.
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Actual/req.
Status
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity required (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor effective capacity (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
Effective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control differential for pressure control (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
Effective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control differential for temperature control (line 1)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for condenser line (line 1)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 1)
--------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
-----
%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg.type
Condenser control type (line 1)
---
Setpoint
F1
…
%
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Actual/req.
Status
Condenser control effective set point (with compensation applied, line 1)
Power output of fan 1 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 8 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
Power output of fan 9 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 16 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
Outside temperature (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Saturated suction temperature (line 2)
Effective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control differential for pressure control (line 2)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Saturated suction temperature (line 2)
Effective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control differential for temperature control (line 2)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for suction line (line 2)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 2)
Neutral
zone
… (**)
---
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
Ok
Dilute
Off
Off by time
Start up
On by time
On
Mod. manual
Alarm
In pump down
0…999
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0…100
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…100
--------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
-----
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg.type
Compressor control type (line 2)
---
Setpoint
Effective suction pressure set point (with compensation applied, line 2)
Neutral
zone
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
A.Unit status
Pressure
Aa01
Sat.temp.
(display only)
Act.setpoint
Differential
Pressure
Aa02
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
(display only)
Differential
Actual/req.
Aa03
(display only)
Reg.status
Reg.type
Setpoint
C01, C02, …C12
C01
Aa04
(display only)
Aa05
(display only)
Aa11
(display only)
Aa13
(display only)
Aa15
(display only)
Aa16
(display only)
Aa20
(display only)
Aa21
(display only)
…
C12
Temperature
Superheat
Disch.1
…
Disch.6
Liq.inj.1: DO
…
Liq.inj.6: DO
Compressor control type (line 1)
…
Aa22
(display only)
Aa23
(display only)
…
F8
F9
Aa24
(display only)
Aa25
(display only)
Aa31 (display
only)
Aa32
(display only)
…
F16
Aa33
(display only)
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
52
…
ENG
Mask index
Display description
C01, C02, …C12
C01
…
C12
Temperature
Superheat
Disch.1
…
Disch.6
Liq.inj.1: DO
…
Liq.inj.6: DO
Discharge temperature
Cap.reduction
Oil sump temp.
Oil status
Description
Time remaining to next compressor start (line 2)
Capacity delivered by compressor 1 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means
that some form of compressor capacity override is active, e.g. times, alarms,
start-up procedure)
…
Capacity delivered by compressor 12 (line 2)
Suction temperature (line 2)
Superheat (line 2)
Discharge temperature, compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Discharge temperature, compressor 6 (line 2)
Number of digital output associated and status liquid injection compr. 1 (line 2)
…
Number of digital output associated and status liquid injection compr. 6 (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor discharge temperature (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity reduction in progress (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil sump temperature (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil dilution status (line 2)
Status
Digital ScrollTM compressor operating status (line 2)
---
---
Countdown
Compr.
Valve
Requested cap.
Current capac.
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Differential
Actual/req.
Reg.status
Digital ScrollTM compressor time count (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor status (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM valve status(line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity required (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor effective capacity (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 2)
Effective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control differential for pressure control (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 2)
Effective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control differential for temperature control (line 2)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for condenser line (line 2)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 2)
--------------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
-----
s
----%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg.type
Condenser control type (line 2)
---
Setpoint
F1
…
%
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Status,curr.
Condenser control effective set point (with compensation applied, line 2)
Power output of fan 1 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 8 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
Power output of fan 9 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 16 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that some
form of power override is active)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
Outside temperature (line 2)
Effective status of screw compressor 1 with stepped modulation
Neutral
zone
… (**)
---
…
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
0…29
ON / OFF
…
0…29
ON / OFF
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
Ok
Dilute
Off
Off by time
Start up
On by time
On
Manual mod.
Alarm
In pump down
0…999
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
0…100
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…100
-------
…
…
---
Status, req.
Status required for the screw compressor 1 with stepped modulation
---
---
Minimum on time
Min.off/starts
Countdown for minimum on time screw comp. 1 with stepped modulation
Countdown for minimum off time or wait between successive starts screw comp.
1 with stepped modulation
Countdown for next step activation screw comp. 1 with stepped modulation
Effective status of screw compressor 1 with continuous capacity
modulation
-----
s
s
… (**)
… (**)
Off
Start up
Stage1
Off
Start up
Stage1
0…999
0…999
-----
s
---
-----
s
s
Min.on countdown
Status,curr.
Screw comp. 1 off time with continuous capacity modulation
Countdown for minimum off time or wait between successive starts screw comp.
1 with continuous capacity modulation
Countdown to start screw comp. 1 with continuous capacity modulation
Effective status of screw compressor 2
-----
s
---
Status, req.
Status required for the screw compressor 2
---
---
Minimum on time
Min.off/starts
Next step
Zone
Max admit.time
Countdown
Max admit.power
Startup status
Countdown for minimum on time screw comp. 2
Countdown for minim. off time or wait between successive starts screw comp. 2
Countdown for next step activation screw comp. 2
Envelope zone for screw compressor 1
Maximum duration allowed in the zone
Countdown
Maximum capacity allowed in the zone
Start-up status for screw compressor 1
---------
---
s
s
s
--min
s
%
---
N° startup restart
Number of restarts
---
---
Aa34
(display only)
Aa05
(display only)
Aa41
(display only)
Aa43
(display only)
Aa45
(display only)
Aa46
(display only)
Aa50
(display only)
Aa51
(display only)
Default
-----
UOM
s
%
Values
0…32000
0…100
…
--------…
----…
-----
…
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
…
Aa52
(display only)
Aa53
(display only)
…
F8
F9
Aa54
(display only)
Aa55
(display only)
…
F16
Aa60
(display only)
Next step
Status
Aa61
(display only)
Aa62
(display only)
Aa70
(display only)
Shut down countd.
Max.pow.countdown
Aa71
(display only)
53
0… 999
Off
Start up
Norm. operating
0…999
0…999
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Shut down
0…999
Off
Stage 2
Start up
Stage 3
Stage1
Stage 4
Off
Stage 2
Start up
Stage 3
Stage1
Stage 4
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…14
0…999
0…32000
0…100
Off
Compressor on
Intermediate interval
Final interval
Compressor off
Restart Alarm
0…99
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Err.code
Al.code
Description
Type of error in envelope definition
Type of alarm activated
Default
-----
UOM
-----
Envel.def.error code
Type of error in selection of predefined envelope
---
---
Reg.var.
Enable
Control variable value for generic stage function 1
Enabling variable status for generic stage function 1
-----
…
---
Setpoint
Differential
Mode
Status
…
Reg.var.
Enable
Setpoint
Differential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Setpoint
Differential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Setpoint
Differential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Type
Delay time
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Type
Delay time
Status
Weekday
TB1: --:-- -> --:--
Control set point for generic stage function 1
--Control differential for generic stage function 1
--Control mode for generic stage function 1 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic stage function 1
--…
…
Control variable value for the generic stage function 5
--Enabling variable status for the generic stage function 5
--Control set point for the generic stage function 5
--Control differential for the generic stage function 5
--Control mode for the generic stage function 5 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic stage function 5
--Control variable value for generic modulating function 1
--Enabling variable status for generic modulating function 1
--Control set point for generic modulating function 1
--Control differential for generic modulating function 1
--Control mode for generic modulating function 1 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic modulating function 1
--Control variable value for generic modulating function 2
--Enabling variable status for generic modulating function 2
--Control set point for generic modulating function 2
--Control differential for generic modulating function 2
--Control mode for generic modulating function 2 (direct or reverse)
--Status of generic modulating function 2
--Control variable status for generic alarm function 1
--Enabling variable status for generic alarm function 1
--Type of alarm for generic alarm function 1
--Control differential for generic alarm function 1
--Status of generic alarm function 1
--Control variable status for generic alarm function 2
--Enabling variable status for generic alarm function 2
--Type of alarm for generic alarm function 2
--Control differential for generic alarm function 2
--Status of generic alarm function 2
--Day of the week
--Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minutes, end hour and
--minutes for the generic scheduling function
…
…
Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minutes, end hour and
--minutes for the generic scheduling function
Status of generic scheduling function
--Status of heat recovery function (line 1)
--Heat recovery temperature (line 1)
--Status of modulating heat recovery valve output (line 1)
--Status of prevention via heat recovery (line 1)
--Status of heat recovery function (line 2)
--Heat recovery temperature (line 2)
--Status of modulating heat recovery valve output (line 2)
--Status of prevention via heat recovery (line 2)
--Status of ChillBooster device (line 1)
--Outside temperature (line 1)
--ChillBooster activation threshold (line 1)
--Number of minutes elapsed with fans at 100/number of min. allowed (line 1)
--Status of ChillBooster device (line 2)
--Outside temperature (line 2)
--ChillBooster activation threshold (line 2)
--Number of minutes elapsed with fans at 100/number of minutes allowed (line 1) --Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
--Liquid temperature (line 1)
--Subcooling (line 1)
--Status of subcooling function (line 1)
--Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated with
--the first digital input from pLoads (line 1)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated with
--the second digital input from pLoads (line 1)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated with
--the first digital input from pLoads (line 2)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated with
--the second digital input from pLoads (line 2)
Value read by the current sensor (line 1)
--Instant power calculated (line 1)
--Power consumption during the current day (line 1)
--Power consumption during the previous day (line 1)
--User-defined set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
--(line 1)
Effective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with compen- --sation applied, line 1)
Suction pressure control differential, proportional control (line 1)
---
…
…
----…
…
--…
…
----…
--…
…
--%
…
--…
…
--%
------s
--------s
----…
Values
No error / Env. def. inconsist..
No Alarm
Max time elapsed
Zone not allowed
Max. no. of restarts
No error
Comp. not supported
Gas type not allowed
… (**)
Not active
active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
Not active / Active
…
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
Not active / Active
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Light / Serious
0…9999
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Light / Serious
0…9999
Not active / Active
Monday, …, Sunday
…
…
…
…
…
----…
------…
------…
…
min
--…
…
min
…
…
…
---
Not active / Active
OFF / ON
… (**)
0.0…100.0
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
… (**)
0.0…100.0
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
… (**)
… (**)
0…999/0…999
OFF / ON
… (**)
… (**)
0…999/0…999
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Open / Closed
---
OFF / ON
---
OFF / ON
---
OFF / ON
Aa72
(display only)
Aaan
(display only)
…
Aaar
(display only)
Aaas
(display only)
Aaat
(display only)
Aaau
(display only)
Aaav
(display only)
Aaaw
(display only)
Aaax
(display only)
Aaay
(display only)
Aaaz
(display only)
Aaa1
(display only)
Aaa2
(display only)
Aaa4 (display
only)
Aaa5 (display
only)
Aaa6 (display
only)
Ab01
(display only)
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:-Status
Status
Heat recl. temp.
An.OUT modulat.
HR Prevent
Status
Heat recl. temp.
An.OUT modulat.
HR Prevent
Status
Ext.temp.
Ext.temp.thr.
Time fan 100%
Status
Ext.temp.
Ext.temp.thr.
Time fan 100%
Cond.temp.
Liquid Temp.
Subcooling
Status
Action 1
Action 2
Action 1
Action 2
Current
Inst. power
Power today
Previous
User setp.
Actual.setpoint
Diff.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
54
---
OFF / ON
A
kW
kWh
kWh
…
0 to 999.9
0 to 100
0 to 32767
0 to 32767
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
ENG
Mask index
Display description
User setp.
Actual.setpoint
Ab02
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diff.
Decr.diff.
User setp.
Ab03
(display only)
Actual.setp.
Diff.
User setp.
Ab04
(display only)
Ab05
(display only)
Actual.setp.
Neutral zone
Incr.diff.
Decr.diff.
User setp.
Actual.setp.
Diff.
User setp.
Actual.setp.
Ab06
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diff.
Decr.diff.
User setp.
Ab07
(display only)
Actual.setp.
Diff.
User setp.
Actual setp.
Ab08
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diff.
Decr.diff.
Ab12
Ab13
Ab14
Ab15
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Status
Description
Default
User-defined set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
--(line 1)
Effective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with compen- --sation applied, line 1)
Neutral zone for suction pressure control (line 1)
--Increase differential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 1)
--Decrease differential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control
--(line 1)
User-defined set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
--(line 2)
Effective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with compen- --sation applied, line 2)
Suction pressure control differential, proportional control (line 2)
--User-defined set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
--(line 2)
Effective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with compen- --sation applied, line 2)
Neutral zone for suction pressure control (line 2)
--Increase differential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 2)
--Decrease differential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 2)
--User-defined set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (line --1)
Effective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (with
--compensation applied, line 1)
Condensing pressure control differential, proportional control (line 1)
--User-defined set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (line --1)
Effective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (with
--compensation applied, line 1)
Neutral zone for condensing pressure control (line 1)
--Increase differential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control (line --1)
Decrease differential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control
--(line 1)
User-defined set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (line --2)
Effective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (with
--compensation applied, line 2)
Condensing pressure control differential, proportional control
--(line 2)
User-defined set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (line --2)
Effective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control (with
--compensation applied, line 2)
Neutral zone for condensing pressure control (line 2)
--Increase differential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control (line --2)
Decrease differential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control
--(line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
3,5 barg
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 1)
12,0 barg
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
3,5 barg
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 2)
12,0 barg
Unit status (display only)
Off from
keypad
UOM
…
Values
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
---
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Waiting..
Off by default
Unit On/
Off by DIN
Off from alarm
Off from keypad
Off from blackout Manual op.
Off from BMS
Prevent HP
Ac01
Ac02
Ac03
Ac04
Ac06
Ac07
--L1:
L2:
----Enable of unit OnOff
By digit input
By supervisor
By black out
Unit on delay after
blackout
Enable of unit OnOff
By digit input
By supervisor
By black out
Unit on delay after
blackout
On-Off from keypad (line 1)
Unit status (display only)
-----
OFF / ON
…(See above Ac01)
On-Off from keypad (line 1)
On-Off from keypad (line 2)
Enable unit On/Off from digit input (line 1)
OFF
Off from
keypad
OFF
OFF
NO
-------
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
NO / YES
Enable unit On/Off from supervisor (line 1)
Enable unit On/Off from black out (line 1)
System on delay after black out (line 1)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO / YES
NO / YES
0…999
Enable unit On/Off from digit input (line 2)
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable unit On/Off from supervisor (line 2)
Enable unit On/Off from black out (line 2)
System on delay after black out (line 2)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO / YES
NO / YES
0…999
55
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display Description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
B.Input./output (the I/Os available depend on the selected configuration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see
Appendix A.5)
DI
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 1)
03
-----, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
----Closed
Baa02
Open
Logic
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
--Suction pressure probe position (line1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
--Suct pressure probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
-----0-1V - 0-10V- 4-20mA- 0-5V
Bab01
--- (display only)
Suction pressure value (line 1)
--…
… (**)
Upper value
Suct pressure maximum value (line 1)
7,0 barg
…
… (**)
Lower value
Suct pressure minimum value (line 1)
-0,5 barg
…
… (**)
Calibration
Suction pressure probe adjustment (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
Line relay DO
Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Part winding DO/Star relay Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Off ) display
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Bac02
DO (*)
(line 1)
---/ Delta relay DO (*)
Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Logic
DO logic to start compressor 1 (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
DO
Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Bac03
Logic
Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
NO
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
AO
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
0
-----, 01…06 (****)
---Type of output, PWM / phase control for compressor modulating device (line FCS1*-CONBad01
Type (****)
--FCS1*-CONVONOFF
1)
VONOFF
FCS3*-CONV010"
Status (display only)
Modulating device output value (line 1)
0
%
0.0 to 100.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
Suction L1
Suction line 1 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Suction L2
Suction line 2 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Discharge L1
Condenser line 1 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Bb01
Discharge L2
Condenser line 2 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Timeout
Manual mode duration after last key pressed
10
min
0…500
Compressor 1
Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba02
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
…
…
…
…
…
Compressor 12
Manual stage request for compressor 12 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba16
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
Oil cool pump1
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Bba17
Oil cool pump2
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Oil cool fan
Manual operating status for oil cooling fan (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba18
Force to
Compressor 1
Manual stage request for compressor 1 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba20
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
…
…
…
…
Compressor 12
Manual stage request for compressor 12 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba34
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
Oil cool pump1
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Bba35
Oil cool pump2
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Oil cool fan
Manual operating status for oil cooling fan (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba37
Force to
Fan1
Manual operating status for fan 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba38
force
…
…
…
…
…
…
Fan16
Manual operating status for fan 16 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba53
force
Heat reclaim pump
Manual operating status for heat recovery pump (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba54
force
ChillBooster
Manual operating status for ChillBooster (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba55
force
Fan1
Manual operating status for fan 1 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba57
force
…
…
…
…
…
Fan16
Manual operating status for fan 16 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba72
force
Heat reclaim pump
Manual operating status for heat recovery pump (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba73
force
ChillBooster
Manual operating status for ChillBooster (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba74
force
Compressor 1
Manual continuous capacity request for compressor 1 (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb05
Force to
Oil cool pump
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb06
Force to
Compressor 1
Manual continuous capacity request for compressor 1 (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb07
Force to
Oil cool pump
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb08
Force to
Fan1
Manual continuous capacity request for fan 1 (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb09
Force to
Heat reclaim pump
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb10
force
Fan1
Manual continuous capacity request for fan 1 (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Bbb11
Force to
Heat reclaim pump
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 2)
0.0
%
v
Bbb12
force
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
56
ENG
Mask index
Bc01
Bc02
Bca10
…
Display Description
Test Dout
Timeout
Test Aout
Timeout
DO1
…
DO29
Bca26
Bcb10
…
Bcb12
AO1
AO6
Mask index
Display description
Description
Enable DO test mode
Test mode duration after last button pressed
Enable AO test mode
Test mode duration after last button pressed
DO 1 logic for test
DO 1 value for test
…
DO 29 logic for test
DO 29 value for test
AO 1 value for test
…
AO 6 value for test
Default
NO
10
NO
10
NO
OFF
…
NO
OFF
0.0
…
0.0
UOM
--min
--min
----…
------…
---
Description
Default
UOM
Values
NO / YES
0…500
NO / YES
0…500
NO / NC
OFF / ON
…
NO / NC
OFF / ON
0.0…100.0
…
0.0…100.0
Values
C.Compressors(*) (The I/Os available depend on the selected configuration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see Appendix
A.5)
Caa01
…
Caa08
Caa09
…
Caa14
…
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Line relay DO
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 1)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
…
Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Off ) display
(line 1)
Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
03
--NC
--…
…
…
---
---, 01…29 (****)
Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1)
DO logic to start compressor 1 (line 1)
Unloader 1 for compressor 1 DO position (line 1)
Status of unloader 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Logic of unloader 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
Unloader 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
…
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
…
NC
…
--NC
--…
0
------------…
---
---, 01…29 (****)
NC / NO
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control for compr. modulating device (line 1)
FCS1*-CONVONOFF
---
----, FCS1*-CONVONOFF
FCS3*-CONV010"
Status (display only)
…
-----
Modulating device output value (line 1)
…
Suction pressure probe position (line1)
Suct pressure probe type (line 1)
0
…
B1
4-20mA
%
…
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
Regulation by
Regulation type
Suction temperature value (line 1)
Suct pressure maximum limit (line 1)
Suct pressure minimum limit (line 1)
Suction pressure probe adjustment (line 1)
…
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Compressor control type (line 1)
--7,0 barg
-0,5 barg
0.0 barg
…
PRESSURE
NEUTRAL
ZONE
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
PROPORT.
300
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO
… (**)
15
…
…
…
…
…
----…
…
…
--s
…
…
…
…
--…
s
0.0…100.0
…
---, B1…B10 (****)
---0-1V
0-10V
4-20mA
0-5V
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
PROPORTIONAL PROP.+INT.
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
0…9999
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
Part winding DO/Star relay
DO (*)
---/ Delta relay DO (*)
Logic
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
AO
--------…
---
Caaal
…
Cab01
Minimum
Maximum
Setpoint
Reg.type
Cab04/Cab6 (**)
Integral time
Cab05/Cab7 (**) Differential
NZ diff.
Cab08/Cab10 (**) Activ.diff.
Deact.diff.
En.force off power
Cab09/Cab11 (**)
Setp.for force off
Power load to 100% min
time
Cab12
Power load to 100% max
time
Power unload to 0% min
time
Cab13
Power unload to 0% max
time
Enable Aux cont.
Probe type
Cab02
Cab03
Compressor setpoint lower limit (line 1)
Compressor setpoint higher limit (line 1)
Compressor setpoint (line 1)
Type for proportional control (line 1)
Integral time for proportional control (line 1)
Differential for proportional control (line 1)
Neutral zone control differential (line 1)
Neutral zone control differential for device activation (line 1)
Neutral zone control differential for device deactivation (line 1)
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Enable auxiliary control
Probe used for auxiliary control
NO
PRESSURE
Refrig. type
Type of refrigerant in auxiliary circuit
R404A
Working hours
Compressor 1
(Check in…)
Compressor 2
(Check in…)
…
Working hours
Compressor 11
(Check in…)
Compressor 12
(Check in…)
Compressor threshold
working hours
Compressor hours reset
Compressor 1 operating hours (line 1)
---
h
NO/YES
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C
-R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32\
0…999999
Compressor 1 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 2 operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 2 remaining operating hours (line 1)
…
Compressor 11 operating hours (line 1)
…
--…
…
---
h
h
h
…
h
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
…
0…999999
Compressor 11 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 12 operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 12 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor maintenance threshold hours (line 1)
…
--…
88000
h
h
h
h
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
0…9999999
Reset compressor operating hours (line 1)
N
---
NO / YES
Cab20
Cac01
…
Cac11
Cac13
Cac14
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…29 (****)
57
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Cad01
Cad02
Cad03
Cad04
Cad05
Cad06
Cad08
Cad09
Cad10
Cad11
Display description
Description
Enable suction setpoint
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 1)
compensation
Enable compensation by
Enable setpoint compensation by probe (suction line 1)
analog IN
Winter offset
Offset applied for Winter period
Closing offset
Offset applied for closing period
Enable setpoint compensa- Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (suction line 1)
tion by scheduler
Activ.Time Bands
Day of the week
TB1: --:-- -> --:-Time band 1 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
…
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:-Time band 4 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
Changes
Time band change action
Cae26
Cae27
Cae28
Cae29
NO / YES
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, TUE, ...SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
Change set by DI
-----
Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1)
Position of the probe for suction pressure setpoint compensation (line1)
Type of the probe for suction pressure setpoint compensation (line1)
NO
--4-20mA
-------
--- (display only)
max
min
Enable floating suction
setpoint
Maximum floating setpoint
Minimum floating setpoint
Max.setpoint variation
admitted
Offline decreasing time
Compensation value (line 1)
Maximum value of compensation (line 1)
Minimum value of compensation (line 1)
Enable floating setpoint (suction line 1)
------NO
…
…
…
---
Max compressor floating setpoint settable (line 1)
Minimum compressor floating setpoint settable (line 1)
Maximum delta admitted for floating setpoint (suction line 1)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Reduction time when supervisor is offline for floating setpoint
(suction line 1)
0
min
0…999
NO
---
NO / YES
…(**)
60
…
s
NO ACTION
---
0.0 to 99.9
60…9999
NO ACTIONLIMIT TO CURRENT
CAPACITYLIMIT CAPACITY TODEC.
CAPACITY BY
Enable interactions with
Enable interactions with pLoads (line 1)
pLoads
Pressure threshold disabled Suction pressure threshold for disabling pLoads (line 1)
Reactivate delay
pLoads activation delay, previously disabled by a threshold
Config. action 1
Configuration of action associated with the first digital input connected to
pLoads (line 1)
---
Percentage value to limit capacity to or reduce capacity by if the ''LIMIT CAPACITY TO'' or ''LIMIT CAPACITY BY'' actions have been configured respectively
0.0
(line 1)
%
0.0 to 100.0
Config. action 2
Configuration of action associated with the second digital input connected to
NO ACTION
pLoads (line 1)
---
NO ACTIONLIMIT TO CURRENT
CAPACITYLIMIT CAPACITY TODEC.
CAPACITY BY
%
0.0 to 100.0
-----
NO / YES
NO / YES
---
SINGLE-PHASE/THREE-PHASE
V
-------
0 to 999
0.0 to 1.0
NO / YES
0…4/7 (*)
…
---
Alarm1 description (*)
Selection of the first compressor alarm description: Rotation, Oil warning (line …
1)
---
Activ.delay
Start up delay
Reset
Priority
…
Suction pressure/temperature high alarm
Threshold
Alarm diff.
Activation delay for compressor alarm 1 during working (line 1)
Activation delay for compressor alarm 1 at start up (line 1)
Type of reset for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
Type of priority for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
…
Type of high suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
0
0
AUT.
SERIOUS
…
ABSOLUTE
s
s
----…
---
x (Not available)
o (Not selected)
x (Selected)
x (Not available)
o (Not selected)
x (Selected)
0…999
0…999
AUT. / MAN.
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
High suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
High suction pressure/temperature alarm differential
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
Alarm delay
Suction pressure/temperature low alarm
Threshold
Alarm diff.
Alarm delay
Enable oil temperature
alarm management (*)
Enable discharge temp.
alarm management (*)
Enable
Low superheat alarm
threshold
Alarm diff.
Switch OFF comp.
Reset
Alarm delay
High suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Type of low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
120
ABSOLUTE
s
---
0…999
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm differential
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Enable Digital Scrollä oil temperature alarm (line 1)
… (**)
… (**)
30
NO
…
…
s
---
… (**)
… (**)
0…999
NO / YES
Enable Digital Scrollä discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable alarm/warning+alarme (line 1)
Threshold for low superheat alarm (line 1)
NO
3,0
--K
NO/WARN+ALARM/ONLY ALARM
0.0…99.9
Low superheat alarm differential (line 1)
Enable compressor off for low superheat alarm (line 1)
Type of low superheat alarm reset (line 1)
Low superheat alarm delay (line 1)
1,0
NO
MANUAL
30
K
----s
0.0…9,9
NO / YES
MANUAL / AUTO
0…999
Voltage
Cos(phi)
Reset counter
Number of alarms for each
compressor
Alarm1 description
Cae03
Cae25
---
---
Cae02
Cae24
NO
0
Load
…
Values
Copy settings to other days
Enable supervisor action
Enable
Cae04
UOM
--NO / YES
Copy to
---
Cae01
Default
--CONFIRM&SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY;
MON-FRI; MON-SAT;
SAT&SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
---, B1…B10 (****)
---0-1V - 0-10V- 4-20mA- 0-5V
-99.9…99.9
-99.9…99.9
-99.9…99.9
NO / YES
Cad12
Cad13
NO
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Percentage value to limit capacity to or reduce capacity by if the ''LIMIT CAPACITY TO'' or ''LIMIT CAPACITY BY'' actions have been configured respectively
0.0
(line 1)
Enable pLoads action from supervisor (line 1)
NO
Enable calculation of power consumption
NO
SINGLE-PHANumber of phases
SE
Mains voltage
400
Displacement (cosφ)
1.0
Reset current power counter
NO
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
1/4 (*)
Selection of the first compressor alarm description: Generic, Overload, High
pressure, Low pressure, Oil (line 1)
58
ENG
Mask index
Cae30
Cae40
Display description
Time of semi-automatic
alarm evaluation
N° of reties before alarm
becomes manual
Switch off comp.1
Reset
Alarm delay
Compressors type
Description
Time of semi-automatic alarm evaluation for screw compressors out
of envelope (line 1)
Number of retries before alarm becomes manual (line 1)
2
UOM
min
0…999
3
---
0…9
Enable compressor 1 off for compressor inverter warning (line 1)
Type of compressor inverter warning reset (line 1)
Compressor inverter warning activation delay (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 1)
NO
MANUAL
0
RECIPROCATING
----s
---
Compressors number
Cmp1,…
Number of compressors (line 1)
Enable compressors (line 1)
2/3 (*)
DIS
-----
NO / YES
MANUAL/AUTO
0…999
RECIPROCATING
SCROLL
SCREW
1…6/12 (*)
DIS / EN
Refrigerant type
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
R404A
---
Min on time
Min off time
Min time to start same
compressor
Ignition type
Minimum compressor on time (line 1)
Minimum compressor off time (line 1)
Minimum time between same compressor starts (line 1)
30
120
360
s
s
s
Type of compressors start up
DIRECT
---
Star time
Star line delay
Star delta delay
Partwinding delay
Equalization
Equalizat.time
Devices rotation type
Star relay run time
Delay between star and line relay
Delay between star and delta relay
Partwinding delay
Enable compressors equalization at start up
Equalization duration
Type of rotation
0
0
0
0
NO
0
FIFO
ms
ms
ms
ms
--s
---
Dev. unload sequence
Unloader sequence in relation to compressor activation (C=compressor,
p=unloader)
CpppCppp
---
Load up time
Load down time
Unloader delay
Custom rotation
Switch ON order
Custom rotation
Switch OFF order
Modulate speed device
Delay between different compressor starts
Delay between different compressor stops
Delay between stages
Order of switch ON for compressor custom rotation
10
0
0
1
s
s
s
---
DIRECT
PART WINDING
STAR DELTA
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
NO / YES
0…999
-----FIFO
LIFO
TIME
CUSTOM
-------CCpppppp
CpppCppp
0…999
0…999
0…999
1…16
Order of switch OFF for compressor custom rotation
1
---
1…16
Compressor driver type (line 1)
NONE
---
Min. frequency
Max. frequency
Min on time
Min off time
Min time to start same
compressor
Digital Scrollä comp. valve
regulation
Minimum inverter frequency
30
Maximum inverter frequency
60
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum ON time (line 1)
30
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum OFF time (line 1)
60
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum time between same compressor 180
starts (line 1)
Digital Scrollä comp. valve control type (line 1)
OPTIMISED
CONTROL
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
NONE
INVERTER
DIGITAL SCROLL
CONTINUOUS SCREW
0…150
0…150
0…999
0…999
0…999
Cycle time
Oil dilution
Disch.temper.
Compr.Manufacturer
Cycle time value (line 1)
Digital Scrollä, enable oil temperature alarm (line 1)
Digital Scrollä, enable discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
Compressor manufacturer for screw compressors
13
ENABLE
ENABLE
GENERIC
s
-------
Compressor series
Number of valves
Stages configuration
Compressor series
Number of valves used for capacity control
Stage configuration for screw compressor 1
…(***)
3
25/50/75
/100
----%
Enable common delay time (from one stage to the following) for screw
ENABLE
compressor 1
Common time/time betwe- Common delay time (from one stage and the following) for screw compressor 0
en steps
1
From…to…
Minimum compressor delay time in order to reach each capacity stage from …
previous for screw compressor 1
Intermittent valve time
Intermittent on/off time for capacity control valves for screw compressor 1
10
Valve conf.
Configuration of the behaviour of the valves during start/stop and stages for …
screw compressor 1
---
Caf02
Caf03
Default
Caf04
Caf05
Caf06
Caf07
Caf08
Caf09
Caf10
Caf11
Caf12
Caf13
Caf14
Caf15
Caf16
Caf17
Caf18
Caf19
---
Caf20
Caf21
Common time
Caf22
Caf23
Caf24
Caf25
Caf26
Caf27
Limit comp.permanence at Enable time limit at minimum capacity for screw compressor 1
min power
Max.perman.time
Max time for compressor operation at minimum capacity for screw compressor 1
Limitat.on for
Time to return to minimum after the compressor was forced to second stage
after staying at minimum for max. time for screw compressor 1
Min.output power
Minimum compressor capacity in case of high capacity range (usually 25%),
only for continuous compressors
Compressor start-up phase Start-up phase time (after electric start-up)
duration
Maximun time to reach
Maximum time in order to reach maximum compressor capacity (continuous
-maximum power
capacity control)
-minimum power
Minimum time in order to reach minimum compressor capacity (continuous
capacity control)
59
Values
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32
0…999
0…999
0…999
OPTIMISED CONTROL
VARIABLE CYCLE TIME
FIXED CYCLE TIME
12…20
DISABLE/ENABLE
DISABLE/ENABLE
GENERIC / BITZER
REFCOMP / HANBELL
…(***)
1…4
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
DISABLE/ENABLE
s
0…999
s
0…999
s
---
ENABLE
---
60
s
0…99
O (ON)
X (OFF)
I (Intermittent)
P (Pulsing)
DISABLE
ENABLE
0…9999
0
s
0…9999
25
%
0…100
10
s
0…999
120
s
0…999
120
s
0…999
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Intermittent
Pulse period
Min.Puls.Incr.
Max.Puls.Incr.
Min.Puls.Decr.
Max.Puls.Decr.
Valve conf.
Description
Intermittent on/off time for capacity control valves
Pulsing period for valves (for continuous compressors)
Minimum pulse time for increase capacity (valves control)
Maximum pulse time for increase capacity (valves control)
Minimum pulse time for decrease capacity (valves control)
Maximum pulse time for decrease capacity (valves control)
Configuration of the behaviour of the valves during start/stop, incr.min% to
100%, decr.100% to min%, standby, decr.100% to 50%
Number of valves
Stages configuration
Number of control capacity valves for screw compressor 2
Stage configuration for screw compressor 2
Caf90
…
Different sizes
Different number of valves
S1
…
Enable compressors of different sizes (line 1)
Enable compressor capacity control (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
Caf91
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
YES
100
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
C01
…
C12
Min on time
Min off time
Min time to start same
compressor
Reactivate start-up
procedure after
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Nominal freq.
Nominal power
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Minimum Digital ScrollTM compressor On time (line 1)
Minimum Digital ScrollTM compressor Off time(line 1)
Minimum time between starts for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
60
180
360
…
--kW
--…
--s
s
s
Values
0…99
1…10
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
O (ON)
X (OFF)
I (Intermittent)
P (Pulsing)
1…4
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
NO / YES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
--NO / YES
0.0…500.0
NO/YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
S1…S4
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
0…999
0…999
0…999
Digital ScrollTM compressor start-up procedure reactivation time (line 1)
480
min
0…9999
0.0
10.0
50
10.0
V
V
Hz
kW
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
0.0…500.0
90
30
YES
s
s
---
0…600
0…600
NO / YES
NO
---
NO / YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
NO
---
NO / YES
NO
---
NO / YES
--------…
----…
---
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
…
0…999999
Caf28
Caf29
Caf36
…
Caf92
Caf93
Caf95
Cag01
Cag02
Cag03
Cag04
Cag05
Cag06
Cag07
Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Nominal frequency (nominal capacity at nominal frequency) (line 1)
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency
(line 1)
Rising time
Time to pass from min capacity to max capacity for modulat. device (line 1)
Falling time
Time to pass from max capacity to min capacity for modul. device (line 1)
Enable compressor modula- Enable compressor 1 modulation inside Neutral zone (line 1)
tion inside neutral zone
Enable suction press.backup Enable screens for suction pressure backup probe configuration
probe
(line 1)
Request in case of regulat. Compressor forcing value in case of suction probes fault (line 1)
probe fault
Enable anti liquid return
Enable liquid non return function (line 1)
valve
Enable compressor envelop Enable compressor envelope management (screw only).
management (*)
For details on configuration contact Carel.
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
DI
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 2)
Status (display only)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Cba01
Logic
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Function (display only)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 2)
…
…
…
Regulation by
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 2)
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 2)
Cbb01
…
Cbc01
…
Cbd01
…
Cbe01
…
Cbg01
…
3
25/50/
75/100
…
NO
NO
YES
10.0
…
NO
UOM
s
s
s
s
s
s
---
--%
…
------kW
…
----kW
--%
…
Working hours
Compressor 1
…
Enable suction setpoint
compensation
Enable compensation by
analog IN
…
Number of alarms for each
compressor
…
Compressors type
…
Compressor 1 max operating hours (line 2)
03
--NC
--…
PRESSURE
NEUTRAL
ZONE
…
---
…
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 2)
…
NO
…
---
…
NO / YES
Enable setpoint compensation by probe (suction line 2)
NO
---
NO / YES
…
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
…
1
…
---
…
0 to 4
…
Type of compressors (line 2)
…
---
Compressors number
…
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Number of compressors (line 2)
…
Voltage corresponding at the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
Voltage corresponding at the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
…
RECIPROCATING
2/3 (*)
…
0.0
10.0
…
RECIPROCATING
SCROLL
1…12
…
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
Nominal freq.
Nominal frequency (nominal capacity at nominal frequency) (line 2)
50
Hz
0…150
Nominal power
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency
(line 2)
…
10.0
kW
0.0…500.0
…
…
…
Cbf02
…
Default
10
3
0,5
1,0
0,5
1,0
…
…
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
60
--…
Hz
Hz
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
D.Condensers (The I/Os available depend on the selected configuration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see
Appendix A.5)
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of fan 1 overload DI (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Daa01
Logic
Logic of fan 1 overload DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
--Condenser probe position (line 1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
---0-1V
--Condenser probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
--0-10V
4-20mA
Daa39
0-5V
--- (display only)
Condensing pressure value (line 1)
--…
…(**)
Max limit
Maximum condensing pressure value (line 1)
30,0 barg
…
…(**)
Min limit
Minimum condensing pressure value (line 1)
0,0 barg
…
…(**)
Calib.
Condensing pressure probe calibration (line 1)
0,0 barg
…
…(**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
DO
Fan 1 DO position (line 1)
03
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of fan 1 DO (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Daa21
Logic
Logic of fan 1 DO (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Fan 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
AO
Inverter fan AO position (line 1)
0
-----, 01…06 (****)
FCS1*-CONFCS1*-CONVONOFF; " -----";"
Daa38
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control per AO fan inverters (line 1)
--VONOFF
MCHRTF*";" FCS3*-CONV010"
Status (display only)
Inverter fan output value (line 1)
0
%
0.0…100.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
Regulation by
Condenser control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
PRESSURE
--PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
Regulation type
Condenser control type (line 1)
PROPORTI.
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
Dab01
BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
Minimum
Condenser setpoint lower limit (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Dab02
Maximum
Condensers setpoint higher limit (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Dab03
Setpoint
Condenser setpoint (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Fans work only when at
Enable fan operation linked to compressor operation
NO
--NO / YES
Dab04
least one compressor works
Cut_Off enable
Enable fan cut-off function
NO
--NO / YES
Dab05
Cut-Off request
Diff.
Hysteresis
Reg.type
Cut-off value
Cut-off differential
Cut-off hysteresis
Type for proportional control (condenser line 1)
0.0
… (**)
… (**)
PROP.
%
…
…
---
300
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO
… (**)
15
s
…
…
…
…
--…
s
0.0…100.0
… (**)
… (**)
PROP.
PROP.+INT.
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
0…9999
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
NO
---
NO / YES
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, ...SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
0
---
NO
---
--CONFIRM&SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
0.0
…
-9.9…9.9
NO
---
NO / YES
NO
ABSOLUTE
-----
NO / YES
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
24.0 barg
1.0 barg
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
60
ABSOLUTE
s
---
0…999
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
7.0 barg
…
… (**)
Dab6/ Dab8 (**)
Integral time
Integral time for prop. control (cond. line 1)
Differential
Differential for proportional control (cond. line 1)
NZ diff.
Neutral zone control differential (line 1)
Dab10/Dab11 (**) Activ.diff.
Neutral zone control differential for device activation (line 1)
Deact.diff.
Neutral zone control differential for device deactivation (line 1)
En.force off power
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Dab12/Dab13 (**)
Setp.for force off
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Power load to 100% min
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone control
time
(condenser line 1)
Dab14
Power load to 100% max
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone control
time
(condenser line 1)
Power unload to 0% min
Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
time
(condenser line 1)
Dab15
Power unload to 0% max
Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
time
(condenser line 1)
Enable condensing setpoint Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
Dad01
compensation
Winter offset
Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
Dad02
Closing offset
Offset applied for Winter period
Enable setpoint compensa- Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
Dad03
tion by scheduler
Activ.Time Bands
Day of the week
TB1: --:-- -> --:-Time band 1 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
…
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:-Time band 4 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
Dad04
Changes
Time band changes action
Dab7/ Dab9 (**)
Copy to
Dad05
Dad06
Dad07
Dae01
Dae02
Dae03
Copy settings to other days
Enable floating condensing Enable floating setpoint (condenser line 1)
setpoint
Offset for external tempe- Temperature delta for floating setpoint (condenser line 1)
rature
Controlled by:
Enable floating condensing from digital input
-Digital input
Change set by digital input Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suction/condensing line 1)
Cond.pressure/temperature Type of high condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
high alarm
Threshold
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Cond.pressure/temperature High condensing pressure/temperature alarm differential (line 1)
alarm diff.
Alarm delay
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Cond.pressure/temperature Type of low condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold
low alarm
(line 1)
Threshold
Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
61
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
Cond.pressure/temperature Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm differential (line 1)
alarm diff.
Alarm delay
Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Common fan overload
Common fan overload (line 1)
Delay
Common fan overload alarm activation delay
Reset
Type of common fan overload alarm reset
Number of present fans
Number of fans (line 1)
Fan1, Fan2, …
Enable fans 1 to 12 (line 1)
Fan13, Fan14, …
Enable fans 13 to 16 (line 1)
Refrigerant type
Type of refrigerant (condenser line 1)
1.0 barg
…
… (**)
30
YES
AUTOMATIC
0
3
EN
EN
R404A
s
----s
---------
Devices rotation type
Type of rotation devices (condenser line 1)
FIFO
---
Custom rotation
Switch ON order
Custom rotation
Switch OFF order
Modulate speed device
Switch ON order for fans with custom rotation (condenser line 1)
1
---
0…999
NO / YES
AUTOMATIC / MANUAL
0 to 500
0 to 16
DIS / EN
DIS / EN
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32
-----FIFO
LIFO
TIME
CUSTOM
1…16
Switch OFF order for fans with custom rotation (condenser line 1)
1
---
1…16
Fan driver type (line 1)
NONE
---
Type of output, PWM / phase control for condenser modulating device (line
1)
----
---
NO
0.0
10.0
60
100
1200
--V
V
%
%
s
NONE
INVETER
PHASE CONTROL
---MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
NO / YES
0.0 to 9.9
0.0 to 99.9
0…100
0…999
0 to 32000
1200
s
0 to 32000
1
NO
---
-------
0 to 16
NO / YES
NO / YES
----10.0 °C
----…
NO / YES
NO / YES
-99.9…99.9
2.5 °C
CUSTOM
…
---
Only when enabling type is GREATER THAN or LESS THAN, number of fans to
consider for splitting (line 1)
Disable split condenser when high condensing pressure prevent occurs (line
1)
Duration of split condenser deactivation for high condensing
pressure prevent (line 1)
Enable silencer (line 1)
Maximum request allowed when silencer function is active (line 1)
Silencer controlled by digital input (condenser line 1)
0
---
-99.9…99.9
CUSTOM
ODD
EVEN
GREATER THAN
LESS THAN
0 to 16
NO
---
NO / YES
0
h
0 to 24
DISAB.
75.0 %
NO
--%
---
DISABLE / ENABLE
0.0…100.0
NO / YES
NO
-----
----…
NO / YES
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Changes
Silencer controlled by scheduler (condenser line 1)
Day of the week
Time band 1 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (condenser line 1)
…
Time band 4 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (condenser line 1)
Time band changes action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Speed Up
Speed Up time
Ext.Temp.Manage
Ext.Temp.Thresh.
Enable speed up (condenser line 1)
Speed up time (condenser line 1)
Enable speed up management by outside temperature (condenser line 1)
Outside temperature threshold for speed up management
(condenser line 1)
Outside temperature differential for speed up management
(condenser line 1)
Enable the screens for condensing pressure backup probe
configuration (condenser line 1)
Value of fans forcing in case of condensing probes fault (line 1)
YES
5
DIS
25.0 °C
--s
--…
--CONFIRM&SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
0…60
DIS / EN
-99.9…99.9
2.5 °C
…
-99.9…99.9
NO
---
NO / YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 2)
Status (display only)
Status of fan 1 overload DI (line 2)
Logic
Logic of fan 1 overload DI (line 2)
Dba01
Function (display only)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 2)
…
--NC
---
---------
…
…
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active
Active
…
Dae04
Dae05
Daf01
Daf02
Daf03
Daf04
Daf05
Daf07, Daf08
Daf09, Daf10
Dag01
Type (****)
Dag02
Neutral zone reg.
Min.out value
Max.out value
Min. power refer.
Max. power refer.
Rising time
Dag03
Falling time
Dag04
Num.control.fans
Split Condenser
Controlled by:
-Digital input
-External temp.
-Scheduler
Est. Temp.Thr.
Dag05
Est. Temp.Diff.
Type
Fan control also inside Neutral zone (line 1)
Minimum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Maximum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Minimum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Maximum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Time to pass from min capacity to max capacity for fan modulating device
(line 1)
Time to pass from max capacity to min capacity for fan modulating device
(line 1)
Number of fans under inverter (only for alarm enabling)
Enable split condenser (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by digital input (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by outside temperature (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by scheduler (line 1)
Split condenser by outside temperature management setpoint
(line 1)
Split condenser by outside temperature management differential (line 1)
Fans enabled with split condenser (line 1)
Dag06
---
Dag09
Dag10
Disable split condenser as
first stage of HP pressostat
for
Anti-noise
Max output
Controlled by:
-Digital input
-Scheduler
Activ.Time Bands
TB1: --:-- -> --:-…
TB4: --:-- -> --:--
Dag12
Dag13
Ext.Temp.Diff.
Dag14
Dag15
Enable condensing press.
backup probe
Request in case of egulat.
probes fault
…
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
…
62
ENG
Mask index
Dbb01
…
Dbd01
…
Dbe01
…
Dbf01
…
Display description
Regulation by
Regulation type
Description
Condenser control by temperature or pressure (line 2)
Condenser control type (line 2)
…
…
Enable condensing setpoint Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 2)
compensation
…
…
Cond.temperature/pressure Type of high condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold
high alarm
(line 2)
Threshold
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 2)
…
…
Number of present fans
Number of fans (line 2)
…
…
Modulate speed device
Fan driver type (line 2)
Default
UOM
PRESSURE
NEUTRAL
ZONE
…
NO
----…
---
…
ABSOLUTE
…
---
24,0 barg
…
3
…
NONE
…
…
--…
---
Dbg01
…
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control for condenser modulating device (line
2)
----
---
…
…
…
…
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
Values
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
…
NO
YES
…
ABSOLUTE
RELATIVE
… (**)
…
0 to 16
…
NONE
INVETER
PHASE CONTROL
---MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
…
UOM
Values
E.Other funct. (The I/Os available depend on the selected configuration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see Appendix
A.5)
Eaaa04
…
Eaaa45
-----
Oil temperature probe position (line1)
Oil temperature probe type (line 1)
B1
4-20mA
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Common oil cooler
Oil pumps number
Oil temperature probe value (line 1)
Oil temperature probe max. limit (line 1)
Oil temperature probe min. limit (line 1)
Oil temperature probe adjustment (line 1)
…
Oil level valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
Oil level valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Oil level valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
Oil level function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Enable common oil cooling (line 1)
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
03
--NC
--YES
0
…
…
…
…
…
-------------
Enable Aout pump
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 1)
YES
---
Setpoint
Differential
Pump start delay
Oil pumps number
Common oil cooler setpoint (line 1)
Common oil cooler differential (line 1)
Time delay before the start-up of pump 2 after pump1 turns on (line 1)
Screw compressors: number of oil cooler pumps enabled (line1)
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
0
0
…
…
s
---
Enable Aout pump
Screw compressors: enable AO for oil cooler pump (line 1)
YES
---
Setpoint
Differential
Threshold
Differential
Delay
En.oil lev.manag.
Num.Alarm oil level
Time open
Time close
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Subcooling control
---
Screw compressors: oil temperature setpoint (line 1)
Screw compressors: oil temperature differential (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm differential (line 1)
Common oil high temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Enable oil level management (line 1)
Number of compressor alarm associated with oil level (line 1)
Oil level valve opening time (line 1)
Oil level valve closing time (line 1)
Subcooling valve DO position (line 1)
Status of subcooling valve DO (line 1)
Logic of subcooling valve (line 1)
Subcooling valve function status (line 1)
Enable subcooling function (line 1)
Subcooling control type (line 1)
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
°C/°F
s
----s
s
-------------
Threshold
Subcool.value
(display only)
-----
Threshold for subcooling control (line 1)
Subcooling value (line 1)
0.0
0.0
100.0 °C
10.0 °C
0
NO
0
0
0
…
--NO
--NO
BY COND. &
LIQUID TEMP.
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
Type of discharge temperature probe, compressor 1 (line 1)
B1
4-20mA
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Economizer
Compr.Power Thr.
Press.Lim.
Disch.T.Thr.
Economizer
Setpoint
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Maximum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Minimum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Economizer valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
Economizer valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Economizer valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
Economizer valve function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Enable economizer function (line 1)
Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
Enable economizer function for screw compressor 1 (line 1)
Setpoint for economizer function with discharge temperature for screw
compressor 1
Differential for economizer function with discharge temperature for screw
compressor 1
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--NO
0
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
NO
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
----------%
…
…
--…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
0…100
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
NO / YES
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Eaab04
Eaab05
Eaab06
Eaab07
Eaab08
Eaab09
Eaab10
Eaab11
Ebaa01
Ebab01
Ecaa01
…
Ecaa12
Ecab04 (*)
Ecab05 (*)
Differential
63
…
…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
0 to 1 (Analog output)
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
NO (Digital outputs)
YES (Analog output)
… (**)
-9.9…9.9
0…999
0 to 1 (Analog output)
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
NO (Digital outputs)
YES (Analog output)
…
…
…
…
0 to 32767
NO / YES
0 to 4/7 (*)
0…999
0…999
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
BY COND.& LIQUID TEMP.
ONLY BY LIQUID. TEMP.
-9999.9…9999.9
-999.9…999.9
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Ecab06 (*)
Display description
Min.power activ.
Cond.press.check
-----
Description
Default
Minimum screw compressor 1 capacity for economizer activation
75
Enable economizer function with condensing temperature for screw
DIS
compressor 1
Setpoint for economizer function with condensing temperature for screw
60.0
compressor 1
Differential for economizer function with condensing temperature for screw 5.0
compressor 1
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
B1
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe position (line1)
4-20mA
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Liquid Injection
Threshold
Differential
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe type (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe value (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe max. limit (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe min. limit (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe adjustment (line 1)
Injection valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Enable liquid injection function (line 1)
Liquid injection set point (line 1)
Liquid injection differential (line 1)
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 1)
Status of heat recovery DI (line 1)
Logic of heat recovery DI (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--DIS
70.0 °C
5,0
…
--NC
Function (display only)
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
AO
Status of heat recovery from digital input DI function (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO position (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO status (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO logic (line 1)
Heat recovery pump status (line 1)
Heat recovery damper AO position (line 1)
Type of output, PWM / phase control for heat recovery damper AO
(line 1)
Heat recovery damper AO status (line 1)
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe position (line 1)
Type of heat recovery outlet temperature probe (line 1)
------------NC
----------FCS1*-CONVO--NOFF
----B1
--4-20mA
---
Setpoint
Differential
Edaa01
…
Edaa12
Edab01/
Edab03 (*)
Eeaa02
Eeaa03
Eeaa04
Type (****)
Status
-----
Eeaa05
Eeab01
Eeab02
Eeab03
Eeab04
Eeab05
Eeab06
Eeab07
Efa05
Efa06
Efa07
Efa08
Efa09
…
Efb05
Efb06
Efb07
--- (display only)
Heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Upper value
Maximum heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Lower value
Minimum heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Calibration
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe calibration (line 1)
Enable Heat Reclaim
Enable heat recovery function (line 1)
Condensing pressure Lower Condensing pressure lower limit for heat recovery (line 1)
Limit
Modulation by temperat.
Enable heat recovery control by discharge temperature (line 1)
Setpoint
Heat recovery: discharge temperature setpoint (line 1)
Differential
Heat recovery: discharge temperature differential (line 1)
Disable floating condensing Disable floating condensing pressure when heat reclaim is active
pressure
Setpoint offset
Offset that must be applied to the condensing setpoint instead of floating
condensing when heat reclaim is active
Enable heat recovery control by scheduler (line 1)
Enable activation by
scheduler
Active.Time Bands
Week of the day
TB1: --:-- -> --:-Time band 1 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (condenser line 1)
…
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:-Time band 4 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (condenser line 1)
Changes
Time band changes action
%
---
UOM
Values
0; 25; 50; 75; 100
DIS / EN
°C/°F
…
°C/°F
…
-----
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
NO
0.0 barg
…
…
…
…
--…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
DIS / EN
… (**)
… (**)
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC
NO
Not active / Active
---, 01…29
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
---, 01…29
---FCS1*-CONVONOFF
MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
NO
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
NO
--…
…
---
NO / YES
… (**)
0.0 ... 99.9
NO / YES
---
…
-99.9…99.9
NO
---
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
--CONFIRM&SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY;
MON-FRI; MON-SAT;
SAT&SUN; ALL DAYS
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DIRECT / REVERSE
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
… (**)
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DIRECT / REVERSE
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
…
…
…
…
…
----------…
…
-------
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Gen.Funct.1
…
Gen.Funct.5
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
--------------Setpoint
Differential
High alarm
High alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
Low alarm
Low alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
…
Gen.Modulat.1
Gen.Modulat.2
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
---------------
Enable generic stage function 1
..
Enable generic stage function 5
Control variable for generic stage function 1
Direct or reverse control
Enabling variable for generic stage function 1
Enable description change
Description
Setpoint for generic stage function 1
Differential for generic stage function 1
High alarm enabling for generic stage function 1
High alarm threshold for generic stage function 1
High alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Low alarm enabling for generic stage function 1
Low alarm threshold for generic stage function 1
Low alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Low alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Type of low alarm for generic stage function 1
…
Enable generic modulating function 1 management
Enable generic modulating function 2 management
Control variable for generic modulating function 1
Direct or reverse modulation
Enabling variable for generic modulating function 1
Enable description change
Description
DISAB.
…
DISAB.
--DIRECT
--SKIP
--0.0 °C
0.0 °C
DISAB.
0.0 °C
0
LIGHT
DISAB.
0.0 °C
0
LIGHT
…
DISAB.
DISAB.
--DIRECT
--SKIP
---
--…
------------…
…
--…
s
----…
s
--…
---------------
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
64
ENG
Mask index
Efb08
Efb09
Efb010
Efb20
…
Efc05
Efc06
Efc07
…
Efd05
Efd06
Efd07
Efe05
Efe06/Efe07 (**)
…
Efe16
…
Efe21
…
Efe29
…
Egaa01
Egaa02
Egab01
Egab02
Egab03
Egab04
Ehb01
Ehb03
Ehb04
Display description
Description
Setpoint
Setpoint for generic modulating function 1
Differential
Differential for generic modulating function 1
High alarm
High alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
High alarm
High alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1
Delay time
High alarm delay for generic modulating function 1
Alarm type
Low alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
Out upper limit
Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1
Out lower limit
Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1
Enable cutoff
Enable cut off function for generic modulating function 1
Cutoff diff.
Cut off differential for generic modulating function 1
Cutoff hys.
Cut off hysteresis for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm
Low alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm
Low alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1
Delay time
Low alarm delay for generic modulating function 1
Alarm type
Low alarm type for generic modulating function 1
…
…
Gen.alarm 1
Enable generic alarm function 1 management
Gen.alarm 2
Enable generic alarm function 2 management
Regulation variable
Monitored variable for generic alarm function 1
Enable
Enabling variable for generic alarm function 1
Description
Enable description change
--------------Description
Alarm type
Alarm type for generic alarm function 1
Delay time
Delay for generic alarm function 1
…
…
Generic Function Scheduler Enable generic scheduler function
Gen.funct.scheduling con- Generic scheduler function considers the same special days and periods of
nected to global scheduling global scheduler
Enable
Enabling variable for generic scheduler function
Activ.Time Bands
Day of the week
TB1: --:-- -> --:-Time band 1 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
…
…
TB4: --:-- -> --:-Time band 4 enabling and definition: start hour and minute, end hour and
minute (suction line 1)
Changes
Time band changes action
Default
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
DISAB.
0.0 °C
0
LIGHT
100.0
0.0
NO
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
DISAB.
0.0 °C
0
LIGHT
…
DISAB.
DISAB.
----SKIP
--LIGHT
0
…
DISAB.
NO
…
…
--…
s
--%
%
--…
…
--…
s
--…
--------------s
…
-----
Values
… (**)
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
0…100
0…100
NO / YES
… (**)
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
LIGHT / SERIOUS
0…9999
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
NO / YES
-------
----…
…
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Gen.A Measure
…
------- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
...
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
...
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Modulating.1
Generic analogue input A unit of measure selection
…
Generic probe A position
Generic probe A type
Generic probe A value
Generic probe A max. limit
Generic probe A min. limit
Generic probe A adjustment
...
Generic digital input F DI position
Status of generic digital input F DI
Logic of generic digital input F DI
Status of generic digital input F DI
...
Generic stage 1 DO position
Status of generic stage 1 DO
Logic of generic stage 1 DO
Generic stage 1 DO function status
…
Generic modulating 1 AO position
Type of output, PWM / phase control for generic modulating function 1 AO
(line 1)
Generic modulating 1 output value
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 1)
Logic of ChillBooster fault DI (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster fault (line 1)
ChillBooster DO position (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster DO (line 1)
Logic of ChillBooster DO (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster function (line 1)
Enable ChillBooster function (line 1)
Fan capacity under which ChillBooster is deactivated (line 1)
°C
--…
…
B1
--4-20mA
----…
30.0 barg
…
0.0 barg
…
0.0 barg
…
…
…
--------NC
------…
…
…
------NO
------…
…
0
--FCS1*-CONVO--NOFF
0
%
…
…
--------NC
------…
------NO
------NO
--95
%
--CONFIRM&SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL DAYS
°C; °F; barg; psig; %; ppm …
---, B1…B10 (****)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
FCS1*-CONVONOFF; "-----";"
MCHRTF*";" FCS3*-CONV010"
0.0…100.0
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
0…100
Type (****)
Status (display only)
…
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Device present
Deactivation when fanspower falls under
5
Fans work at maximum capacity at least for this time before
Before the activation fans
ChillBooster activation (line 1)
at max for
Ext.Temp.Thr.
Outside temperature threshold for ChillBooster activation (line 1)
30.0 °C
Sanitary proc.
Enable hygiene procedure (line 1)
Disab.
start at
Hygiene procedure starting time (line 1)
00:00
Duration
Hygiene procedure duration (line 1)
0
Ext.temp.thr
Outside temperature threshold for hygiene procedure activati. (line 1)
5,0 °C
ChillBooster requires main- ChillBooster maximum running time (line 1)
200
tenance after
Reset maintenance time
ChillBooster maintenance time reset (line 1)
NO
Avoid simultaneous pulses Enable simultaneous compressor start up inhibition
NO
betw.lines
Delay
Delay between start up for compressors on different lines
0
Force off L2 Comp.s for line Enable line 2 compressor switch OFF due to line 1 compressor fault
NO
1 fault
Delay
Delay for line 2 compressor switch off after serious alarm on line 1 compres- 0
sors
Switch on L1 Comp.s for L2 Enable line 1 compressor switch ON due to line 2 compressor
NO
activation
switch ON
Switch on period
Delay for line1 compressor switch on for line 2 compressor switch on
30
Force off line 2 if line 1 is off Enable line 2 compressor switch OFF due to line 1 switch OFF
NO
65
UOM
min
0 to 300
…
----min
…
h
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
0 to 30
… (**)
0…999
-----
NO / YES
NO / YES
s
---
0…999
NO / YES
s
0…999
---
NO / YES
s
---
0…999
NO / YES
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Ehb05
Eia02
Eia04
Eib02
Eib04
Eic02
Eic03
Display description
Description
Enable min threshold for L1 Enable L1 activation by DSS only when suction pressure is greater than a
activation
minimum threshold
Threshold
Minimum threshold for line 1 activation by DSS
Setpoint SH
PID control set point (valve 1)
LowSH thres.
Low superheat protection threshold (valve 1)
LOP thresh.
Low operating pressure protection threshold (valve 1)
MOP thresh.
Maximum operating pressure protection threshold (valve 1)
Setpoint SH
PID control set point (valve 2)
LowSH thres.
Low superheat protection threshold (valve 2)
LOP thresh.
Low operating pressure protection threshold (valve 2)
MOP thresh.
Maximum operating pressure protection threshold (valve 2)
Enable manual
Enable manual positioning (valve 1)
Valve position
Manual valve position:
Manual position (valve 1)
Enable manual
Enable manual positioning (valve 2)
Valve position
Manual valve position:
Manual position (valve 2)
S1 offset
Probe S1 reading offset (valve 1)
S1 probe (display)
Value read by probe S1 (valve 1)
S2 offset
Probe S2 reading offset (valve 1)
S2 probe (display)
Value read by probe S2 (valve 1)
S3 offset
Probe S3 reading offset (valve 1)
S3 probe (display)
Value read by probe S3 (valve 1)
S4 offset
Probe S4 reading offset (valve 1)
S4 probe (display)
Value read by probe S4 (valve 1)
Alarm:
Abilita l’allarme sonda S1 ( valvola 1 )
EN.
Default
NO / YES
--11.0
5.0
-50.0
50.0
11.0
5.0
-50.0
50.0
…
K
K
----K
K
-----
… (**)
-40.0…180.0
-40.0…180.0
-60.0… 200.0
-60.0… 200.0
-40.0…180.0
-40.0…180.0
-60.0… 200.0
-60.0… 200.0
---
Min / Max
NO
0
0
0.0
--0.0
--0.0
--0.0
---
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S1 reading (valve 1)
Maximum probe S1 reading (valve 1)
Minimum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S2 alarm (valve 1 )
-1.0
9.3
-1.0
9.3
Type:
Type of probe S2 (valve 1)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S3 alarm (valve 1)
-50.0
105.0
Type:
Type of probe S3 (valve 1)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S3 reading (valve 1)
Maximum probe S3 reading (valve 1)
Minimum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S4 alarm (valve 1)
-1.0
30.0
-1.0
30.0
Type:
Type of probe S4 (valve 1)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Minimum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 1)
-50.0
105.0
ID1 configuration:
Configuration of action of digital input 1 on driver (valve 1)
REG. BACKUP
ID2 configuration:
Configuration of action of digital input 2 on driver (valve 1)
DISABLED
Eic09
DI1:
DI2:
Digital input 1 status (valve 1)
Digital input 2 status (valve 1)
-----
Eic10
Valve A relay config.:
Configuration of digital output1 (valve 1)
ALARM RELAY
Eic11
Valve B relay config.:
Configuration of digital output 2 (valve 1)
ALARM RELAY
S1 offset
S1 probe (display)
S2 offset
S2 probe (display)
S3 offset
S3 probe (display)
S4 offset
S4 probe (display)
Alarm:
EN.
Probe S1 reading offset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S1 (valve 2)
Probe S2 reading offset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S2 (valve 2)
Probe S3 reading offset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S3 (valve 2)
Probe S4 reading offset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S4 (valve 2)
Enable probe S1 alarm (valve 2)
0.0
--0.0
--0.0
--0.0
---
Type:
Type of probe S1 (valve 2)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S1 reading (valve 2)
Maximum probe S1 reading (valve 2)
Minimum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Enable probe S2 alarm (valve 2)
-1.0
9.3
-1.0
9.3
Type:
Type of probe S2 (valve 2)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Minimum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 2)
-50.0
105.0
Eic07
NO/YES
--Min / Max
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
°C/°F
°C/°F
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
°C/°F
°C/°F
EN./DIS.
4-20mA
Eic06
NO/YES
NO
Type of probe S1 (valve 1)
Eic05
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
°C/°F
°C/°F
CAREL NTC / 0-10V EXT. SIGNAL /
NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
EN./DIS.
EN./DIS.
°C/°F
°C/°F
Eic08
Eic12
Eic13
Eic14
Eic15
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Values
---
Type:
Eic04
UOM
NO
CAREL NTC / NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL
NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. / VALVE
FORCED 100% OPEN / BATTERY
ALARM MNG. / VALVE REGULATION
OPT. AFTER DEFROST
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. / VALVE
FORCED 100% OPEN / BATTERY
ALARM MNG. / VALVE REGULATION
OPT. AFTER DEFROST
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY /
SOLENOID VALVE RELAY / VALVE +
ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM
RELAY / VALVE POSITION RELAY
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY /
SOLENOID VALVE RELAY / VALVE +
ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM
RELAY / VALVE POSITION RELAY
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
°C/°F
°C/°F
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
°C/°F
°C/°F
EN./DIS.
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
°C/°F
°C/°F
CAREL NTC / 0-10V EXT. SIGNAL /
NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
66
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Alarm:
EN.
Enable probe S3 alarm (valve 2)
Type:
Type of probe S3 (valve 2)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S3 reading (valve 2)
Maximum probe S3 reading (valve 2)
Minimum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Enable probe S4 alarm (valve 2)
-1.0
30.0
-1.0
30.0
Type:
Type of probe S4 (valve 2)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Minimum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 2)
-50.0
105.0
ID1 configuration:
Configuration of action of digital input 1 on driver (valve 2)
REG. BACKUP
ID2 configuration:
Configuration of action of digital input 2 on driver (valve 2)
DISABLED
Eic19
DI1:
DI2:
Digital input 1 status (valve 2)
Digital input 2 status (valve 2)
-----
Eic20
Valve A relay config.:
Configuration of digital output1 (valve 2)
ALARM RELAY
Eic21
Valve B relay config.:
Configuration of digital output 2 (valve 2)
ALARM RELAY
Eid02
Valve A opening at start-up
Valve A opened in stand-by
Start-up delay after defrost
Valve A preposit. delay
Prop Gain:
Integral time:
Derivat.time:
LowSH protect.:
LOP protection:
MOP protection:
Threshold:
Integr.time:
Alarm timeout
LowSH:
LOP:
MOP:
Threshold
Timeout
Valve A opening at start-up
Valve A opened in stand-by
Start-up delay after defrost
Valve A preposit. delay
Prop Gain:
Integral time:
Derivat.time:
LowSH protect.:
LOP protection:
MOP protection:
Threshold:
Integr.time:
Alarm timeout
LowSH:
LOP:
MOP:
Threshold
Timeout
Min.steps
Max.steps
Closing steps
Min.steps
Max.steps
Closing steps
Enable EVD in PLB x
EVD valves number
EVS 1 Address
EVS 2 Address
Valve opening at start of control (valve 1)
Enable valve opening with control not active (valve 1)
Start control delay after defrost (valve 1)
Stationary time when valve pre-positions (valve 1)
Control proportional gain (valve 1)
Control integral time (valve 1)
Control derivative time (valve 1)
Integral time with low superheat protection (valve 1)
Integral time with low operating pressure protection (valve 1)
Integral time with maximum operating pressure protection (valve 1)
High condensing temperature protection activation threshold (valve 1)
Integral time with high condensing temperature protection (valve 1)
High condensing temperature alarm delay (valve 1)
Low superheat alarm delay (valve 1)
Low operating pressure alarm delay (valve 1)
Maximum operating pressure alarm delay (valve 1)
Low suction temperature protection threshold (valve 1)
Low suction temperature alarm delay (valve 1)
Valve opening at start of control (valve 2)
Enable valve opening with control not active (valve 2)
Start control delay after defrost (valve 2)
Stationary time when valve pre-positions (valve 2)
Control proportional gain (valve 2)
Control integral time (valve 2)
Control derivative time (valve 2)
Integral time with low superheat protection (valve 2)
Integral time with low operating pressure protection (valve 2)
Integral time with maximum operating pressure protection (valve 2)
High condensing temperature protection activation threshold (valve 2)
Integral time with high condensing temperature protection (valve 2)
High condensing temperature alarm delay (valve 2)
Low superheat alarm delay (valve 2)
Low operating pressure alarm delay (valve 2)
Maximum operating pressure alarm delay (valve 2)
Low suction temperature protection threshold (valve 2)
Low suction temperature alarm delay (valve 2)
Minimum step configuration, valve 1
Maximum step configuration, valve 1
Closing step configuration, valve 1
Minimum step configuration, valve 2
Maximum step configuration, valve 2
Closing step configuration, valve 2
Enable the EVD management on current board
Number of drivers managed
Serial address of driver 1
50
NO
10
6
15.0
150
5.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
0.5
600
300
300
600
-50.0
300
50
NO
10
6
15.0
150
5.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
0.5
600
300
300
600
-50.0
300
50
480
500
50
480
500
NO
1
198
Serial address of driver 2
199
0…207
Defaults:
Force Parameters:
Regulation based on:
Run driver parameter setting procedure
Override driver parameter settings
Select cooling capacity used for control
NO
NO
LINE 1 COMP
LINE 1 COMP. / LINE 2 COMP
Eic16
Eic17
Eic18
Eid04
Eid06
Eid08
Eid10
Eid11
Eid13
Eid15
Eid17
Eid19
Eid21
Eid23
Eid24
Eid26
Eie02
Eie04
Eif01
Eif02
Description
Default
UOM
Values
EN./DIS.
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
Barg/pisg -20.0...200.0
Barg/pisg -20.0...200.0
Barg/pisg -20.0...200.0
Barg/pisg -20.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
67
°C/°F
°C/°F
%
min
s
s
s
s
s
s
°C/°F
s
s
s
s
s
°C/°F
s
%
min
s
s
s
s
s
s
°C/°F
s
s
s
s
s
°C/°F
s
CAREL NTC / NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL
NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. / VALVE
FORCED 100% OPEN / BATTERY
ALARM MNG. / VALVE REGULATION
OPT. AFTER DEFROST
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. / VALVE
FORCED 100% OPEN / BATTERY
ALARM MNG. / VALVE REGULATION
OPT. AFTER DEFROST
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY /
SOLENOID VALVE RELAY / VALVE +
ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM
RELAY / VALVE POSITION RELAY
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY /
SOLENOID VALVE RELAY / VALVE +
ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM
RELAY / VALVE POSITION RELAY
0…100
NO/YES
0…60
0…18000
0.0…800.0
0…1000
0…1000
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
-60.0…200.0
0.0…800.0
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
-60.0…200.0
0…18000
0…100
NO/YES
0…60
0…18000
0.0…800.0
0…1000
0…1000
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
-60.0…200.0
0.0…800.0
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
-60.0…200.0
0…18000
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
NO/YES
1/2
0…207
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Eif03
Display description
Description
Default
Valve:
Type of valve connected to the driver
Main Regulation:
Main control for the valve, for details refer to manual +0300005EN
Auxiliary regulation:
Safety or auxiliary control
CAREL EXV
Auxiliary refrigerant:
Refrigerant used for P -> T conversion of probe S3 with high condensing
temperature protection
R744
S1 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S1 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
S2 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S2 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
Eif11
DC power supply
Configure the type of power supply used for the driver
NO
Eif12
Valve:
Type of valve connected to the driver
CAREL EXV
Eif05
Eif06
UOM
R404 CONDENSER FOR
SUBCRITICAL
CO2
INVERSE HIGH
CONDENS.
TEMP. PROTECTION ON S3
Possible control functions in manual +0300005EN
Possible control functions in manual +0300005EN
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE CLOSED
/ VALVE AT FIXED POS / USE BACKUP
S3
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE CLOSED
/ VALVE AT FIXED POS / USE BACKUP
S4
NO / YES
USER DEFINED / CAREL EXV /
ALCO EX4 / ALCO EX5 / ALCO EX6
/ ALCO EX7 / ALCO EX8 CAREL
RECOMMENDED / ALCO EX8 ALCO
SPECIFICATION / SPORLAN SEI 0.5-11
/ SPORLAN SER 1.5-20 / SPORLAN SEI
30 / SPORLAN SEI 50 / SPORLAN SEH
100 / SPORLAN SEH 175 / Danfoss
ETS 12.5-25B / Danfoss ETS 50B /
Danfoss ETS 100B / Danfoss ETS 250
/ Danfoss ETS 400 / TWO CAREL EXV
TOGETHER / SPORLAN SER(I) G, J, K
/ Danfoss CCM 10-20-30 / Danfoss
CCM 40
Eif09
Main control for the valve, for details refer to manual +0300005EN
Auxiliary regulation:
Safety or auxiliary control
Auxiliary refrigerant:
Refrigerant used for P -> T conversion of probe S3 with high condensing
temperature protection
R744
S1 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S1 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
S2 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S2 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
Eif14
Eif15
R404 CONDENSER FOR
SUBCRITICAL
CO2
INVERSE HIGH
CONDENS.
TEMP. PROTECTION ON S3
Main Regulation:
Possible control functions in manual +0300005EN
Possible control functions in manual +0300005EN
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE CLOSED
/ VALVE AT FIXED POS / USE BACKUP
S3
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE CLOSED
/ VALVE AT FIXED POS / USE BACKUP
S4
NO / YES
Eif18
Eif20
DC power supply
Configure the type of power supply used for the driver
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
--Oil temperature probe position (line 2)
--Oil temperature probe type (line 2)
Eaba04
…
Eabb04
…
Ebba01
…
Ebbb01
…
Values
USER DEFINED / CAREL EXV / ALCO
EX4 / ALCO EX5 / ALCO EX6 / ALCO
EX7 / ALCO EX8 CAREL RECOMMENDED / ALCO EX8 ALCO SPECIFICATION / SPORLAN SEI 0.5-11
/ SPORLAN SER 1.5-20 / SPORLAN
SEI 30 / SPORLAN SEI 50 / SPORLAN
SEH 100 / SPORLAN SEH 175 / Danfoss ETS 12.5-25B / Danfoss ETS 50B
/ Danfoss ETS 100B / Danfoss ETS
250 / Danfoss ETS 400 / TWO CAREL
EXV TOGETHER / SPORLAN SER(I)
G, J, K / Danfoss CCM 10-20-30 /
Danfoss CCM 40
NO
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
Oil pumps number
Oil temperature probe value (line 2)
Oil temperature probe max. limit (line 2)
Oil temperature probe min. limit (line 2)
Oil temperature probe adjustment (line 2)
…
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
0
…
…
…
…
…
---
Enable Aout pump
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 2)
YES
---
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Subcooling control
---
…
Subcooling valve DO position (line 2)
Status of subcooling valve DO (line 2)
Logic of subcooling valve (line 2)
Subcooling valve function status (line 2)
…
Enable subcooling function (line2)
Subcooling control type (line 2)
…
--------…
-----
Threshold
Subcool.value
(display only)
…
Threshold for subcooling control (line 2)
Value of subcooling (line 2)
…
…
--NO
--…
NO
COND&
LIQUID TEMP.
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
…
…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
0 to 1 (digital input)
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
NO (Digital outputs)
YES (digital input)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
NO / YES
COND&LIQUID TEMP.
LIQUID TEMP. ONLY
-9999.9…9999.9
-999.9…999.9
…
…
…
…
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
68
B1
4-20mA
-----
ENG
Mask index
Ecbb04
…
Display description
Economizer
Compr.Power Thr.
Press.Lim.
Disch.T.Thr.
…
-----
Description
Enable economizer function (line 2)
Capacity percent threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
…
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe position (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe type (line 2)
Default
NO
0
0.0 °C
0.0 °C
…
B1
4-20mA
--%
…
…
…
-----
UOM
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
Liquid Injection
Threshold
Differential
…
DI
Status
Logic
Function
Enable Heat Reclaim
…
DI
Status
Logic
Function
…
Device present
Deactivation when fanspower falls under
…
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe value (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe max. limit (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe min. limit (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe adjustment (line 2)
…
Enable liquid injection function (line 2)
Liquid injection setpoint (line 2)
Liquid injection differential (line 2)
…
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 2)
Status of heat recovery DI (line 2)
Logic of heat recovery DI (line 2)
Status of heat recovery from digital input DI function (line 2)
Enable heat recovery function (line 2)
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 2)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 2)
Logic of ChillBooster fault DI (line 2)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 21)
…
ChillBooster function enable (line 2)
Fans capacity under which ChillBooster is deactivated (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
DIS
70.0 °C
5,0
…
…
--NC
--NO
…
----NC
--…
NO
95
…
…
…
…
…
--…
…
…
----------…
--------…
--%
Values
NO / YES
0…100
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
DIS / EN
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
NO / YES
0…100
…
…
…
…
Edba01
Edba01
…
Edbb01
…
Eeba02
Eebb01
…
Egba01
…
Egbb01
…
Mask index
Display description
F.settings
Summer/Winter
Faaa01
Special days
Holiday periods
Begin
Faaa02
End
Faaa03
Day 01
…
…
Faaa04
Day 10
P1
--…
Faaa05
P5
--Date format
Description
Default
UOM
Enable Summer/Winter period management (line 1)
Enable special days management (line 1)
Enable holiday period management (line 1)
Summer period beginning date (line 1)
Summer period end date (line 1)
Special day 1 date (line 1)
…
Special day 10 date (line 1)
Holiday period P1 beginning date (line 1)
Holiday period P1 end date (line 1)
…
Holiday period P5 beginning date (line 1)
Holiday period P5 end date (line 1)
Date format
NO
NO
NO
------…
------…
----DD/MM/YY
------------…
------…
-------
Hour
Date
Day (display only)
Daily saving time
Transition time
Start, ...
End, ...
Language
Disable language mask at
start-up
Countdown
Main mask selection
Hour and minute
Date
Day of the week calculated from current date
Enable daylight saving time
Offset time
Starting week, day and month and hour for daylight saving time
End week, day and month and hour for daylight saving time
Current language
Disable the change language screen at start-up
…
…
…
DISABLE
60
…
…
ENGLISH
YES
…
…
…
----…
…
-----
Starting value for countdown, time change language screen active.
Main screen selection
60
LINE 1
s
---
Address
Protocol
Address of the controller in a supervisory system network (line 1)
Supervisor communication protocol (line 1)
196
pRACK
MANAGER
-----
Baudrate
Address
Protocol
Supervisor communication baud rate (line 1)
Address of the controller in a supervisory system network (line 1)
Supervisor communication protocol (line 1)
19200
1
-----
CAREL
---
19200
0000
--NO
0000
1234
1234
---------------
Faab01
Faab02/Faab03/
Faab04
Faab05
Fb01
Fb02
Fb03
Fca01
Fca02
Fd01
Fd02
Fd03
Baudrate
Insert password
Logged as (display only)
Logout
User
Service
Manufacturer
Supervisor communication baud rate (line 1)
Password
Current password level
Logout
User password
Service password
Manufacturer password
Values
NO / YES
NO / YES
NO / YES
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
…
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
…
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
---DD/MM/YY
MM/DD/YY
YY/MM/DD
…
…
Monday… Sunday
DISABLE / ENABLE
0 to 240
…
…
…
NO / YES
0…60
LINE 1 / LINE 2
DOUBLE SUCTION
DOUBLE CONDENSER
0 to 207
-CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
CAREL SLAVE REMOTE
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
1200 to 19200
0…207
--CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
1200…19200
0…9999
User, Service, Manufacturer
NO / YES
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
69
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Address
Protocol
Description
Enable summer/winter period management (line 2)
Enable special days management (line 2)
Default
196
pRACK
MANAGER
Baudrate
Address
Protocol
Enable holiday period management (line 2)
Enable summer/winter period management (line 2)
Enable special days management (line 2)
19200
1
Baudrate
Enable holiday period management (line 2)
19200
Fcb01
MODBUS
SLAVE
Fcb01
Mask index
Display description
Description
UOM
Values
--0 to 207
----, CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
CAREL SLAVE REMOTE
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
--1200 to 19200
--0…207
---, CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
--MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
--1200…19200
Default
UOM
Values
G.Safety
Gba01
Prevent enable
Setpoint
Differential
Decrease compressor
power time
Enable Heat Reclaim as first
prevent step
Offset HeatR.
Enable ChillBooster as first
prevent step
Offset Chill.
Prevent max.num
Prevent max.number
evaluation time
Reset automatic prevent
Gba02
Gba03
Gba04
Gba05
Max.num prevent
Gba07
Enable condensing pressure prevent (line 1)
Condensing pressure prevent threshold (line 1)
Condensing pressure prevent differential (line 1)
Decreasing capacity time (line 1)
NO
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
0
--…
…
s
NO / YES
… (**)
0.0 to 99.9
0…999
Enabling heat recovery as first stage for condensing HP prevent
(line 1)
Offset between heat recovery and prevent setpoint (line 1)
Enable ChillBooster as first stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
0.0 barg
NO
…
---
0.0 to 99.9
NO / YES
Offset between ChillBooster and prevent setpoint (line 1)
Maximum number of prevent allowed before locking compressor (line 1)
Prevent maximum number evaluation time
0.0 barg
3
60
…
--h
0.0 to 99.9
1…5
0…999
Reset number of prevent (line 1)
Maximum number of prevent allowed before locking compressor (line 1,
auxiliary regulation)
Tempo di valutaz.num.max
Prevent maximum number evaluation time (auxiliary regulation)
prevent
Riabilita prevent automatico Reset number of prevent (line 1, auxiliary regulation)
Threshold:
Threshold for low pressure prevent with auxiliary regulation
Band:
Differential for the prevent re-enter
Minimum Power request:
Minimum power request in prevent
Align Pow.Req at the end of At the end of prevent action power requst is calculated starting from the last
prevent
request value and not from the value available before the prevent action
Use Suction UoM
Unit selection for prevent threshold and differential
Gba08
Gba09
Common HP type
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 1)
Common HP delay
Common high pressure delay (line 1)
Common LP start delay
Low common condensing pressure delay at start up (line 1)
Common LP delay
Low common condensing pressure delay during operation (line 1)
Time of semi-automatic
Period of LP evaluation (line 1)
alarm evaluation
N° of reties before alarm
Number of LP in period after which the alarm becomes manual
becomes manual
(line 1)
Liquid alarm delay
Liquid level alarm delay (line 1)
Oil alarm delay
Common oil alarm delay (line 1)
Output alarms relays activa- Select alarm relay output activation for active alarms or alarms not reset
tion with
Gca01
Gca02
Gca03
Gca04
Gca05
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Gbb01
Prevent enable
Enable condensing pressure prevent (line 2)
…
…
…
Common HP type
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 2)
Gcb01
Common HP delay
Common high pressure delay (line 2)
…
…
…
Mask index
Display description
NO
---
NO / YES
3
---
1…5
60
h
0…999
NO
0.5
0.1
20.0
--NO / SI
Barg/psig -1.0…150.0
Barg/psig 0.0…60.0
%
0.0…100.0
NO
NO / YES
NO
NO / YES
AUTO
10
60
20
120
--s
s
s
min
AUTO / MAN
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
5
---
0…999
0
s
0
s
Active alarms
0…999
0…999
Active alarms
Alarms not reset
NO
…
AUTO
10
…
NO / YES
…
AUTO / MAN
0…999
…
Description
--…
--s
…
Default
UOM
Values
H.Info
H01
(display only)
H02
(display only)
Mask index
Ver.
Bios
Boot
Board type
Board size
Total flash
RAM
Built-In type
Main cycle
Software version and date
Bios version and date
Boot version and date
Type of hardware
Hardware size
Flash memory size
RAM size
Type of built-in display
Number of cycles per second and software cycle time
Display description
Description
…
…
…
…
…
---------
----------kB
kB
--cycles/s
ms
Default
UOM
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
None / PGD1
…
Values
I.Setup
Pre-configuration
Pre-configuration selected
01. RS2
---
Boards necessary
Suction line
Condenser line
pLAN boards required for the selected pre-configuration
Number of suction lines featured in the pre-configuration
Number of condenser lines featured in the pre-configuration
-------
-------
Ia01
Ia02 (disp. only)
Ia03 (disp. only)
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
70
--NOT USED—
01. RS2
02. RS3
03. RS3p
04. RS3i
05. RS4
06. RS4i
07. SL3d
--0 to 2
0 to 2
08. SL5d
09. SW1
10. SW2
11. SW3
12. d-RS2
13. d-RS3
14. d-RS4
ENG
Mask index
Default
…
RECIPROCATING
…
RECIPROCATING
1/4 (*)
EN
EN
EN
SUCTION +
CONDENSER
°C/barg
RECIPROCATING
UOM
-------------------
Compressors number
Number of compressors (line 1)
Number of alarms for each Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
compressor
Modulate speed device
Modulating speed device for first compressor (line 1)
2/3 (*)
1
-----
None
---
Compressors sizes
Compressors sizes (line 1)
SAME CAPACITY
& SAME STAGE
CONF.
---
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
YES
10.0
…
NO
--YES
100
--kW
…
--kW
--%
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
…
NO
---
…
--kW
C01
…
C12
Compr.Manufacturer
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressor manufacturer for screw compressors
S1
…
S1
Generic
--…
-----
Compressor series
Compressors sizes
S1
Compressor series
Compressor sizes (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
Ib16
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
…(***)
SAME CAPACITY
YES
--…
NO
---
------kW
…
--kW
---
--C01
…
C06
Compressors sizes
S1
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
S1
…
--SAME CAPACITY
YES
--…
NO
--S1
…
S1
PRESSURE
barg
R404A
--…
------kW
…
--kW
--…
---------
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 1)
NEUTRAL ZONE
Ia04 (display only)
Ia05 (display only)
Ib01
Ib02
Display description
Num.Comp. L1
Comp.type L1
Num.Comp. L2
Comp.type L2
Num.alarms per comp.
Cond.Gen.Alarm
HP comm.pressostat
LP comm.pressostat
Type of Installation
Description
Number of compressors featured in the pre-configuration (line 1)
Type of compressors featured in the pre-configuration (line 1)
Number of compressors featured in the pre-configuration (line 2)
Type of compressors featured in the pre-configuration (line 2)
Number of alarms for compressor featured in the pre-configuration
Enable common condenser alarm
Enable common HP pressure switch
Enable common LP pressure switch
Type of system
Measure Units
Compressors type
Unit of measure
Type of compressors (line 1)
-----
Ib03
Ib04
Ib05
Ib30
Ib34
Ib35
Ib36
Ib10
Ib11
Ib17
Ib20
Ib21
Ib22
Ib45
Ib50
Ib51
NO
3,5 barg
0,3 barg
NO
NO
---
NO / YES
RECIPROCATING
3
1
-------
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
1…12
0 to 4
NONE
---
Compressors sizes
Compressors sizes (line 1)
SAME
CAPACITY
---
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
YES
--…
NO
---
--kW
…
--kW
NONE
INVERTER
---/DIGITAL SCROLL(*)
SAME CAPAC.&SAME STAGE CONF.
SAME CAPAC.&DIFF. STAGE CONF.
DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
Ib52
Ib70
Ib74
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
NO / YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
GENERIC
BITZER
REFCOMP
HANBELL
…(***)
SAME CAPACITY / DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
Enable integral time action Enable integral time for proportional suction line control (line 1)
Setpoint
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
Differential
Differential (suction line 1)
Configure another suction Second suction line configuration
line
Dedicated pRack board for Suction lines on different boards
suction line
Compressors type
Type of compressors (line 2)
Compressors number
Number of compressors (line 2)
Number of alarms for each Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
compressor
Modulate speed device
Modulating speed device for first compressor (line 2)
Ib41
Ib43
NONE / INVERTER
---/DIGITAL SCROLL(*)
---/STEPLESS*)
SAME CAPAC&SAME STAGE CONF.
SAME CAPAC.&DIFF. STAGE CONF.
DEFINE SIZES
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
SAME CAPACITY / DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
…
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
--NO / YES
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
Ib40
Ib42
Values
1…12
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL SCREW
1…12
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
0 to 4/7 (*)
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
SUCTION / CONDENSER
SUCTION + CONDENSER
°C/barg / °F/psig
RECIPROCATING
SCROLL / SCREW
1…6/12 (*)
0 to 4/7 (*)
71
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Mask index
Ib75
Ib76
Ib60
Ib61
Ib62
S1
Display description
Description
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
Default
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
C01
…
C12
Compressors sizes
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
SAME
CAPACITY
YES
--…
NO
--S1
…
S1
PRESSURE
barg
R404A
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 1)
NEUTRAL ZONE
YES
100
Ib80
Ib81
Ib82
Ib90
Ib91
Enable integral time action Enable integral time for proportional suction line control (line 2)
NO
Setpoint
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
3.5 barg
Differential
Differential (suction line 2)
0.3 barg
Dedicated pRack board for Suct.line(s) and cond.line(s) on different boards, that is, condenser line(s) on NO
condenser line
dedicated board
Fans number
Number of fans (line 1)
3
Modulate speed device
Fan modulating speed device (line 1)
NONE
Ib92
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Fans control by temperature or pressure value (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (condenser line 1)
PRESSURE
barg
R404A
Regulation type
Fan control type (line 1)
PROPORTIONAL
BAND
NO
12,0 barg
2,0 barg
NO
Ib93
Ib94
Ib95
Ib96
Ib1a
…
Ib1e
Enable integral time action Enable integral time for proportional band control
Setpoint
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 1)
Differential
Differential (condenser line 1)
Configure another conSecond condenser line configuration
densing line
Fans number
Number of fans (line 2)
…
…
Differential
Differential (condenser line 2)
Type of Installation
Type of plant
Ic04
-----
0 to 16
NONE
INVERTER
PHASE CONTROL
--PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
--…
--R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
--NO / YES
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
3
…
2,0 barg
SUCTION +
CONDENSER
--…
… (**)
---
Measure Units
Unit of measure
Number of suction lines
Number of suction lines
Dedicated pRack board for Suction lines are on different boards
suction line
Compressors type
Type of compressors (line 1)
°C/barg
1
NO
-------
RECIPROCATING
---
Compressors number
Compressors type
4
RECIPROCATING
-----
0
1
-----
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
SCREW
1…6/12 (*)
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
SCREW
1…6
0…2
4
0
NO
-------
0…16
0…16
NO / YES
--NO
NO
NO
---------
--NO / YES
NO / YES
NO / YES
Ic01
Ic02
Ic03
UOM
Values
--NO / YES
%
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
…
--NO / YES
kW
S1…S4
--S1…S4/INV
…
…
--S1…S4
--SAME CAPACITY
DEFINE SIZES
--NO / YES
kW
0.0…500.0
…
…
--NO / YES
kW
0.0…500.0
--S1…S4/INV
…
…
--S1…S4
--PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
--…
--R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 - R1270
- R417A - R422D -R413A - R422A
- R423A - R407A - R427A - R245Fa
- R407F - R32
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
--NO / YES
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
Ic05
Number of compressors (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 2)
Ic06
Ic07
Ic08
Ic09
Ic10 (display only)
Id01
Id02
Compressors number
Number of compressors (line 2)
Number of condensing
Number of condenser lines in the system
lines
Line 1
Number of fans (line 1)
Line 2
Number of fans (line 2)
Dedicated pRack board for Condenser lines are on different boards
condenser line
Boards necessary
pLAN boards required for the selected pre-configuration
Save configuration
Save Manufacturer configuration
Load configuration
Manual installation of Manufacturer configuration
Restore Carel default
Manual installation of Carel default values
0…16
…
… (**)
SUCTION
CONDENSER
SUCTION + CONDENSER
°C/barg / °F/psig
0…2
NO / YES
Tab. 7.a
(*) Depending on the type of compressor
(**) Depending on the unit of measure selected
(***) Depending on the compressor manufacturer, see relative paragraph
(****) Depending on the hardware size
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
72
ENG
8. ALARMS
pRack pR300 can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital
inputs and to operation of the system. For each alarm, the following are
controlled:
• The actions on the devices, if necessary
• The output relays (one global and two with different priorities, if
configured)
• The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present
• The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic)
• Any activation delay
8.1.3
Log
The alarm log can be accessed:
• from branch G.a of the main menu
• by pressing the
(Alarm) button and then
(Enter) when there are
no active alarms
• by pressing
(Enter) after having scrolled all the alarms.
The alarm log screens show:
Order of activation (no. 01 is the oldest alarm)
Hour and date the alarm was activated
Short description
Main values recorded at the moment the alarm was activated (suction
pressure and condensing pressure)
Note: A maximum of 50 alarms can be logged; after this limit any
new events overwrite the oldest ones, which are therefore deleted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The complete list of alarms, with the related information as described
above, is available in Appendix A.4.
8.1 Alarm management
All alarms feature the following behaviour:
• When an alarm is activated, the red LED flashes and the buzzer is
activated (where present); the output relays corresponding to the
global alarm and to any alarms with priority are activated (if configured)
8.2 Compressor alarms
• Pressing the
(Alarm) button, the red LED stays on steady, the buzzer
is muted and the alarm screen is shown
• If there is more than one active alarm, these can be scrolled using
(Up)
(Down). This condition is signalled by an arrow at the bottom
right of the screen
The number of alarms for each compressor can be set during the
configuration phase using the Wizard or subsequently from branch
C.a.e/C.b.e of the main menu. The number of alarms is the same for all the
compressors on the same line.
• Pressing the
8.2.1
(Alarm) button again for at least 3 seconds acknowledges
the alarms manually, and these are cleared from the display unless
others are active (they are saved in the log)
8.1.1
Priority
For certain alarms, the alarm output relay can be set with two types of
priority:
• R1: serious alarm
• R2: normal alarm
Note: The maximum number of alarms that can be configured for
each compressor depends not only on the type of compressor, but
also on the size of pRack and the number of compressors fitted.
The corresponding relays, once configured, are activated when an alarm
with the corresponding priority occurs.
For the other alarms, the priority is fixed and is associated by default with
one of the two relays.
8.1.2
Compressor alarms each line
After having selected the number of alarms (maximum 4 for the
reciprocating or scroll compressors and 7 for screw compressors), the
settings can be configured for each alarm, choosing a description from the
options shown in the table, the output relay, the type of reset, delay and
priority. The effect of the alarm on the devices is set and involves stopping
the compressor, except for the oil warning.
Acknowledgement
The alarms can
acknowledgement:
have
manual,
automatic
or
semiautomatic
• Manual: the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the
(Alarm)
button twice, the first time displays the corresponding alarm screen
and mutes the buzzer, the second (extended, for at least 3 seconds)
cancels the alarm (which is saved in the log). If the alarm is still active,
acknowledgement has no effect and the signal is shown again.
• Automatic: when the alarm condition ceases, the alarm is automatically
reset, the LED comes on steady and the corresponding screen remains
Possible descriptions for compressor alarms
Reciprocating or scroll
Generic
Overload
High pressure
Low pressure
Oil
displayed until the
(Alarm) button is pressed and held; the alarm is
saved in the log.
• Semiautomatic: acknowledgement is automatic, until a maximum
number of activations in set time. If the number reaches the maximum
set, acknowledgement becomes manual.
Screw
Generic
Overload
High pressure
Low pressure
Oil
Screw rotation
Oil warning (Filter Blocked)
Tab. 8.a
An example of a screen for selecting the description of the alarm is shown
in the figure:
For manual acknowledgement, the functions associated with the alarm
are not reactivated until acknowledgement has been completed, while
for automatic acknowledgement they’re reactivated as soon as the alarm
condition ceases.
73
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
After having selected the ‘generic’ description, no other description can be
selected. In general, the descriptions are divided into four groups:
• generic
• others (overload, oil, high pressure , low pressure)
• screw rotation
• oil warning
8.2.2
After a description has been selected for a certain group, descriptions from
a different group can not be selected for that alarm. For example, generic
only, or overload + oil, or rotation only or overload + high pressure., etc.
can be selected. Each alarm will have one alarm screen, which will show all
the descriptions associated to that alarm. Based on the number of alarms
selected, the descriptions associated by default are shown in the table
below.
Default descriptions based on the number of alarms
Number of alarms
Descriptions
1
Generic
Overload
HP-LP
Overload
HP-LP
Oil
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Rotation
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Rotation
Generic
2
3
4
5
6
7
Low superheat alarm
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in
branchC.a.e.C.b.e branch of the main menu. For this type of alarm, if
enabled, you can choose whether to set a warning and an alarm or just
an alarm. If enabled, it is possible to set the absolute (absolute) threshold
and the activation.
You can also set the delay after which the alarm is entered. When a
warning and alarm is selected, if the measured overheating falls below the
set threshold, the warning is signaled for the signaling purpose only, and
after the delay has been set, the alarm is triggered.
If the special option is enabled, the low overheating alarm has the
capability to turn off all compressors without the timing, so when all the
compressors of the affected line are switched on immediately when the
alarm is activated.
This alarm features manual or automatic reset, as configured by the user.
8.3 Pressure and prevent alarms
pRack pR300 can manage pressure alarms from a pressure switch or probe,
according to the following diagram.
Alarms from pressure switch:
• Low suction pressure
• High condensing pressure
Alarms from probe:
• Low suction pressure
• High suction pressure
• Low condensing pressure
• High condensing pressure
One possible example for the low pressure alarms is shown in the figure:
LP
Differential
Pressostat alarm
Pressure
Probe alarm
Fig. 8.a
In addition, the high pressure alarm features a prevent function, available
by manually overriding the devices as well as using additional functions,
such as heat recovery and ChillBooster.
Operation of the alarms and prevent function is described below.
Tab. 8.b
Note: for oil alarms, special management is available whereby the
alarm is interpreted as an oil level alarm. When the alarm is activated,
a number of attempts are made to restore the level for a set time before
the alarm is signalled and the compressor stopped; see paragraph 6.6.1 for
details.
8.3.1
Pressure alarms from pressure switch
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch G.c.a/
G.c.b of the main menu.
If a modulating device is used for the compressors, further alarms become
available:
• compressor inverter warning, common for the entire suction line, when
the device is an inverter
• oil sump temperature alarm, high discharge temperature and oil
dilution, for Digital Scroll™ compressors
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
The low suction pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect of
stopping all the compressors without observing the various times, therefore
when the digital input configured as low pressure switch is activated, all
the compressors on the line affected are stopped immediately.
For each compressor, two alarm variables are sent to the supervisor, one
for each priority. As well as the alarm signal, the description of the alarm is
also sent to the supervisor, using the values shown in the table:
This alarm features semiautomatic reset, and both the monitoring time
and the number of activations in the specified period can be set. If the
number of activations is higher, reset becomes manual.
In addition, the delay after which the alarm is activated on both start-up
and during operation can be set.
The delay at start-up only applies to unit start-up and not compressor
power-up.
The supervisor can interpret the variables sent by pRack pR300 and provide
the correct description of the alarm.
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
The high condensing pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect
of stopping all the compressors without observing the various times and
forcing the fans on at maximum speed, therefore when the digital input
configured as high pressure switch is activated, all the compressors on the
line affected are stopped immediately and the fans operate at maximum
output.
This alarm features manual or automatic reset, as configured by the user.
The delay after which the alarm is activated can also be set
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
74
ENG
8.3.2
Prevent by activating heat recovery
The parameters corresponding to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/
G.b.b of the main menu, if the heat recovery function is present.
Pressure alarms from probe
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch C.a.e/
C.b.e of the main menu for the suction pressure and D.a.e/D.b.e for the
condensing pressure.
As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
For these types of alarms, reset is automatic and the activation threshold
and differential can be set, as well as the type of threshold, which may be
absolute or relative to the control set point. The figure shows an example
of setting the threshold to relative.
When reaching the threshold, pRack pR300 activates the heat recovery
function, if the conditions allow; see paragraph 6.6.3 for details.
HP
Prevent by activating ChillBooster
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of
the main menu, if the ChillBooster function is present.
Pressure
Differential
Relative threshold
Setpoint
As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
Alarm
Fig. 8.b
Note: for temperature control, the alarms from probe are managed
based on temperature even when pressure probes are fitted.
When reaching the threshold, pRack pR300 force activates the ChillBooster,
if the conditions allow; see paragraph 6.6.5 for details.
The effects of the different pressure alarms from probe are described
below.
The following figure illustrates the activation thresholds for the prevent
function and the safety devices:
Low suction pressure from probe
The low suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping all
the compressors, ignoring the times.
Pressure
HP by pressostat
High suction pressure from probe
The high suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing all the
compressors on, ignoring the control times, but observing the compressor
protection times.
HP by probe
Low condensing pressure from probe
The low condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping
all the fans, ignoring the times.
Prevent
Offset
Heat reclaim
or ChillBooster
High condensing pressure from probe
The high condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing
all the fans on and stopping all the compressors, ignoring the times.
time
Fig. 8.c
8.3.3
High pressure prevention
8.3.4
pRack pR300 can manage 3 types of high condensing pressure prevention
actions, involving:
• overriding the compressors and fans
• activating heat recovery
• activating ChillBooster
Prevent low suction pressure
pR300 offers the possibility to reduce compressor capacity in the event of
low suction pressure. The parameters relating to this function can be set in
branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu.
The effect of this function is to operate the compressors at a set percentage
of capacity as soon as pressure falls below the prevent set point and related
differential (screen Gab06)
In addition to the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and
the activation differential, a compressor deactivation time can be set,
corresponding to the time needed to switch off all the compressors except
for the minimum capacity step.
The evaluation time and number of activations allowed in a certain time
period can also be set. If the number of activations exceeds the setting,
manual reset is required (screen Gab07)
When the prevent function is activated, an alarm icon is shown on the
main screen, and a warning screen appears in the alarms.
Prevent by overriding the compressors and fans
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
of the main menu.
The effect of this type of prevent action is to force all the fans on at
maximum and switch all the compressors off, except for the minimum
capacity stage, ignoring the control times but observing the compressor
protection times. The minimum capacity stage means one compressor in
the case of compressors without capacity control and modulation devices,
or the minimum capacity stage for capacity-controlled compressors (e.g.
25%), or alternatively the minimum output of the modulation device in the
case of inverters, Digital ScrollTM compressors or screw compressors with
continuous modulation.
Prevent low suction pressure with auxiliary control
Advanced configurations are available when using auxiliary control, so as
to ensure a better response when activated.
As well as the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and the
activation differential, a compressor deactivation time can be set,
corresponding to the time needed to switch off all the compressors,
except for the minimum capacity stage.
If the suction pressure falls below the set threshold (screen Gba08),
compressor capacity is reduced proportionally to the limit set point.
Normally, when the prevent function ends, the current capacity is instantly
brought to the level needed to meet the control request.
If the parameter “Align request after prevent” is enabled (screen Gba09),
the current request is aligned with the limit value.
In addition, both the monitoring time and the number of activations in
the specified period can be set. If the number of activations is higher, reset
becomes manual.
75
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
pRack pR300 can be connected to various supervisory systems, specifically
the Carel and Modbus communication protocols can be used. For the Carel
protocol, the PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO models are available.
9.2 Commissioning software
pRack Manager is configuration and real-time monitoring software used
to check the operation of pRack pR300, for commissioning, debug and
maintenance operations.
In addition, pRack pR300 can be connected to the pRack Manager
commissioning software.
The software is available on the internet at http://ksa.CAREL.com in the
section “download à support à software utilities”.The installation includes,
in addition to the program, the user manual and the necessary drivers.
9.1 PlantVisor PRO, PlantWatch PRO, Boss
and Boss-mini supervisory systems
pRack Manager can be used to set the configuration parameters, modify
the values of volatile and permanent variables, save graphs of the main
system values to file, manually manage the unit I/Os using simulation files
and monitor/reset alarms on the unit where the device is installed.
Connection to Carel PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisor
systems uses the RS485 card already fitted on some models of pRack
pR300. For details on the models of card available, see Chapter 1.
pRack pR300 is able to virtualise all the inputs and outputs, both digital
and analogue, therefore each input and output can be overridden by
pRack Manager.
Note: In general, the pRack boards that manage the suction lines
must be fitted with the supervisor connection card, consequently
boards with pLAN address 1 or 2. It is also possible to use the CAREL
protocoll to both BMS ports (J25 biul-it and optional) of eacn board. If a
port is used with CAREL protocoll, it is necessary to set the other with sarà
MODBUS protocoll.
pRack Manager manages <file name>.DEV files that contain the user
parameter configurations and that can be downloaded from the pRack
pR300 board and then subsequently uploaded.
To use the pRack Manager program, a serial converter output RS485 with
CVSTDUTLF0 (telephone connector) or CVSTDUMOR0 (3 pin terminal)
must be connected to the board.
The connection to pRack Manager can be made:
1. Via the RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
2. Via the BMS serial port with RS485 serial card and activating the pRack
Manager protocol by parameter on screen Fca01 or connecting pRack
Manager and selecting SearchDevice = Auto (BMS or FB) on the
“Connection settings” tab. In this case, the connection is established
after around 15-20 seconds.
Three different models of PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO are available,
used to supervise system configurations with one or two lines:
• L1 – one line: can be used for system configurations with just one
suction and/or condenser line.
• L2 – one line: can be used for system configurations with two suction
and/or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by
separate boards.
• Two lines: can be used for system configurations with two suction and/
or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by the same
board.
Important: the BMS serial port should only be used for monitoring
the variables, while to update the software use the RS485 serial port
dedicated to the pLAN connection.
Important: model L2 – One line must be used only in association
with model L1 – One line. For supervision of system configurations
with just one line only model L1 – One line can be used.
The following figure shows an example of connection to the PC via the
RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
Tutorial: the rule applied for using the models is summarised below:
• cconfiguration with board with pLAN address 2 à separate
models
• configuration without board with pLAN address 2 à one model only
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
C8
C7
J14
J10
CVSTDUTLF0
NC8
C7
J13
NO8
C4
NO7
J15
1
C8
2
NC8
C7
ID8
C7
NO8
ID7
C4
NO7
C4
NO6
C1
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
J25 BMS2
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
GND
G
+Vterm
J24
J14
J13
J10
FieldBus card
J1
J12
J11 pLAN
pR300
NO2
J26 FBus2
NO1
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
A connection example for using PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO is
shown in the figure.
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
GND
G
+Vterm
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
CVSTDUMOR0
Power
supply
Fig. 9.a
Fig. 9.b
The complete list of supervisor variables, with the corresponding addresses
and descriptions, can be supplied upon request.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Note: for further details see the pRack Manager program online
help.
76
ENG
10. UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
The pRack pR300 boards are supplied with the software already loaded. If
an update is required, the following can be used:
• pRack Manager
• SmartKey programming key
10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions
10.3.1 File extensions, names and contents
Various types of files can be uploaded and downloaded and are
distinguished by their extension.
Note: The pRack pR300 software is protected by digital signature
and cannot be loaded onto hardware other than pRack pR300 (e.g.
pCO3), otherwise after 5 minutes of operation the software locks up, all the
relays open and the warning “INVALID OEM IDENTIFIER” is shown’.
File names
In order to be recognised, the names of the directories and files on the
pendrive must have no more than 8 characters; the controller makes no
distinction between upper-case and lower-case characters. However,
during DOWNLOAD the names of the directories created by the controller
on the pendrive are always in upper-case.
The update files are available at http://ksa.CAREL.com.
Important: each version of the pRack pR300 software is associated
with a specific controller firmware version (BIOS), therefore if
updating the version, always check and where necessary update the BIOS
on the board. The appropriate BIOS version is supplied together with the
pRack pR300 update files.
FILE TYPES FOR UPLOAD
File extension Description
.IUP
Contains the definitions of the screens on the terminal
.BLB
Contains the application
.BIN
Contains the application (with pLAN table)
.BLX
Contains the Logique of atoms custom in C language
.GRP
Contains the graphics
.DEV
Contains the preset configuration parameter values
PVT,.LCT
Contains the descriptions of the public variables to be logged.
Generated by 1Tool, this is used by the LogEditor module and
must be loaded together with the.LCT file
10.1 Update via pRack Manager /RHEC
Manager
The software resident in the pRack pR300 boards can be updated from a
PC.
Downloaded files are saved in directories created automatically, with the
following name format:
NAMXY_WZ
Where:
NAM: identifies the type of data downloaded (LOG for logs, BKP for the
application, DEV for the buffer memory, CPY for all the data from the
controller).
XY: progressive number from 0 to 99
WZ: controller pLAN address.
For the connection procedure see Chapter 9, while for further details see
the pRack Manager program online help..
Note: The pCOLoad program can also be used to update the pRack
pR300 software, however Winload cannot be used.
10.2 Updating using SmartKey
The SMARTKEY programming key can copy the contents of one pRack
pR300 board to another identical board, using the telephone connector
on the terminal (the pLAN must be disconnected).
Example: a directory named LOG00_01 contains the log files (LOG)
downloaded from a device whose pLAN address is 1. Since the key contained
no directory of this type before download, it is indicated with 00.
From a PC, with the SmartKey Programmer software running, the key can
be configured to perform specific operations: acquire log files, program
applications, etc.
The SmartKey Programmer software is installed together with pRack
Manager.
Important: No more than 100 files of the same type can be
downloaded to the pendrive, as the directories created can only be
numbered with XY=00 to 99.
The following figure shows the connection of the SmartKey to the PC
using the PCOSO0AKY0 converter.
FILE TYPES FOR DOWNLOAD (controller pLAN address = 1)
File extension
Directory name
Description
.DWL
LOG00_01
Logged data
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,.PVT BKP00_01
Application
.DEV
DEV00_01
Non-volatile parameters
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,.PVT CPY00_01
All data on the controller
Tab. 10.c
The downloaded files to have fixed names. In particular, the application file
is called “ppl–pRack.dwl”, the BIOS file “bios–pRack.bin”, the files containing
the logs and related information are “logs.dwl”, “logs.lot” and “logs.pvt”,
respectively. Finally, the buffer memory is saved to the file on the pendrive.
Menu access
The following are the steps for accessing the pendrive management
menu. Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to the master port.
mode
start
PCOS00AKY0
Fig. 10.a
Note: for further details on using the SmartKey, see the corresponding
instruction sheet. For details on the SmartKey Programmer see the
online manual.
USB key
B M S c a rd
Fig. 10.b
77
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
2.
To show a string on the display describing the operation being performed,
add the “[NAM]” instruction, followed by the string to display. The following
file will display the string:
Press Alarm and Enter together for 3 seconds to enter the option
menu. Select FLASH/USB memory and press Enter to confirm.
“UPL CHILLER.DEV”
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
4:45&.*/'03."5*0/
-0(%"5"
05)&3*/'03."5*0/
'-"4)64#.&.03:
[DIR]
CHILLER
Fig. 10.c
3.
[NAM]
UPL CHILLER.DEV
Select USB pen drive and press Enter to confirm.
CHILLER.DEV
/"/%'-"4)'*-&4
64#1&/%3*7&
3. To select only some of the files in the same directory, list them after
a label. The following labels are allowed and must be entered in the
order shown in the table:
Fig. 10.d
UPLOAD file labels
No. Label
File type
1
[BIO] (*)
2
[IUP]
3
[BIN]
4
[DEV]
5
[GRP]
(*) BIO = BIOS file
Important: Wait a few seconds after the pendrive has been plugged
in for it to be recognised by the controller. If the message “No USB disk or PC
connected” is displayed momentarily with the request to connect a pendrive
key or computer USB cable, wait a few seconds until the recognition
message is shown (“USB disk found”) and the following screen appears.
4.
file.bin
file.iup
file.bin, blb
file.dev
file.grp
No.
Label
File type
6
7
8
9
[PVT]
[LCT]
[OED]
[SGN]
file.pvt
file.lct
file.oed
file.sgn
Select UPLOAD.
Notes:
• to get the.bin file from the BIOS in the format available on http://ksa.
carel.com (.os file), unzip the.os file;
4ELECTFUNCTION
61-0"% PENP$0
%08/-0"% P$0PEN
• the [IUP] label can be followed by one or more “.iup” files.
Important:
• the order in which the file names are entered is fundamental and must
Fig. 10.e
not be changed;
• do not enter empty lines or spaces in the file (e.g. at the end of a line);
• each file after the last line of code must contain a “carriage return”
10.3.2 Upload
An application plus BIOS or buffer memory (parameters) can be uploaded
from the pendrive. The following modes are available: automatic, autorun
and manual. Automatic and autorun modes require using configuration files.
character (CR¿ ), as shown in the following example.
Example: The following file will upload the BIOS and an application.
Configuration file structure
Configuration files must start with the string “[FUNCTION]” followed by a
string that identifies the function, as shown in the table.
Function
UPLOAD an application or a BIOS file plus an applic.
UPLOAD non-volatile memory (.dev)
UPLOAD the entire contents of the pRack
[FUNCTION]¿
Upload application¿
¿
[DIR] ¿
NEW AHU ¿
¿
[NAM] ¿
BIOS+APPL+LOGSv58B36 ¿
¿
bisn509.bin ¿
¿
[IUP] ¿
AHU_EN.iup ¿
AHU_IT.iup ¿
¿
[BIN] ¿
AHU.blb ¿
¿
[DEV] ¿
AHU.dev ¿
¿
[GRP] ¿
AHU.grp ¿
¿
[PVT] ¿
AHU.pvt ¿
¿
[LCT] ¿
AHU.lct ¿
String
Upload application
Upload non volatile memory
Copy pRack upload
After the description of the desired function, various options are available:
1. To copy the complete contents of the directory, simply write the
name of the directory (e.g. the entire contents of the CHILLER
directory):
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
[DIR]
CHILLER
2.
To copy just 1 file in a directory, enter the file’s name (e.g. the CHILLER.
DEV file in the CHILLER directory).
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
[DIR]
CHILLER
CHILLER.DEV
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
78
ENG
4.
10.3.3 Automatic upload
To automatically upload the parameter memory using the first
configuration file shown in the preceding paragraph, access the system
menu as previously described and proceed as follows:
1.
The display flashes to indicate that after loading the new BIOS the
controller is being reset.
'8WBMJEBUJPO
1MFBTFXBJU
Select automatic mode. A screen is shown describing the function of
the buttons. Press Enter to confirm.
4ELECTUPLOADMODE
"650."5*$.0%&
."/6"-.0%&
Fig. 10.l
pGD
NO LINK
Fig. 10.f
2.
Confirm by selecting Prg. A screen is displayed requesting confirmation
to upload the non-volatile memory. Press Enter to confirm.
Fig. 10.m
•••
61-'*-&?%&7
5.
The test phase starts.
"PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE
Fig. 10.g
3.
At the end a message will ask the user to remove the pendrive.
Fig. 10.n
•••
•61-0"%*/('*-&
1-&"4&8"*5
pGD
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.h
10.3.4 Upload in autorun mode
Uploading in autorun mode is a special case of uploading in automatic
mode. Unlike automatic mode, the user must wait for a specific message
to appear on the display to start or disable the operation described in the
configuration file. To upload a file in autorun mode, a configuration file
must be created and named “autorun.txt”.
Fig. 10.o
6.
The controller warns that no application has been loaded.
"PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE
Example of uploading BIOS+application
The upload involves two steps: first the BIOS is updated and then the
application. The information is shown on the pRack’s built-in display and
on the pGDE terminal, when both are featured.
Fig. 10.p
Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to port A.
pGD
/0-*/,
USB key
BMS card
7.
Fig. 10.q
The application update then starts.
Fig. 10.i
2.
After a few seconds, Autorun mode starts. Press Enter to confirm.
6PLOADAPPL
•1LEASEWAIT
•
"65036/.0%&
61-0"%"11-*"5*0/
1RESS&/5&3TOSTART
&4$TOEXITAUTORUN
Fig. 10.r
3.
Fig. 10.j
The validity of the FW is checked and the BIOS is loaded.
pGD
/0-*/,
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
Fig. 10.s
Fig. 10.k
79
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
8.
Remove the pendrive. The update is complete. Wait for the display to stop
flashing, indicating that the controller is being reset before restarting.
2.
Download completed.
0PERATIONCOMPLETE
%ATADOWNLOADED
TO#,1?
•
6QMPBEDPNQMFUF
3FNPWF64#LFZ
BOEXBJUSFTFU
Fig. 10.w
Example: On the controller with address 1, the autorun file will create a
directory called BKP00_01 and copy the files APPL_PRack.DWL and FILE_
DEV.DEV to this directory.
Fig. 10.t
pGD
Connecting to a computer
Connect the slave USB port on the controller to the USB port on the
computer where pRack Manager is installed.
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.u
Important: As can be seen, when updating the BIOS and the
application, the pGDE terminal shows the message “NO LINK”, meaning
that no connection is established. Do not remove the terminal and wait for
the end of the update procedure, when the pGDE terminal replicates the
messages on the built-in display.
Note: Autorun run is especially useful in those cases in which the
same operation needs to be performed on several controllers. For example,
to load different applications on controllers connected in a pLAN network,
only one autorun file needs to be created; this uploads the various directories
contained on the pendrive based on the address of the controllers. The
controller with address XY will only load the directory called “nomedir_XY”
[“DirName_XY”]. The pendrive then only needs to be plugged into each
controller to run the upload, confirming from the shared terminal.
Fig. 10.x
Important:
• do not install any type of converter between the computer and port B,
even if requested by the program’s guided procedure;
• pRack Manager manages compressed files (.GRT/.OS).
Once the connection is established, the following operations are available:
UPLOADING the application or BIOS+application.
DOWNLOADING the non-volatile memory.
Commissioning
Managing the NAND flash memory.
Once the USB cable is removed, the port will become available again after
approximately 5 s.
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.3.5 Manual upload
To manually upload the contents of the pendrive the user must access the
management menu from the system screens, selecting UPLOAD and then
MANUAL. The files are selected by pressing ENTER when the cursor is on the
desired file name. A selected file is marked by the symbol “*” on the left. Once
the files have been selected (all in the same directory), press PRG to start the
upload. To display the contents of a directory press ENTER. To go up one
directory level press ESC. Once the upload has started, the messages shown
on the screen are the same as in automatic and autorun mode.
Important: If no connection is established with pRack Manager
after plugging in the USB cable, wait at least 1 minute before using the USB
ports again after removing the cable.
10.4 Configuring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a
system screen
10.3.6 Download
As mentioned above, the DOWNLOAD operation can be managed in two ways:
1. Manual mode: follow the steps described in the paragraph “Automatic
upload” and select manual operation. Then each file must be selected
and downloaded.
2. Autorun mode: prepare a file called “autorun.txt”, containing a string
that identifies the function to be performed.
See par. 6.6 for information on how to access the BIOS system menu.
Starting from:
• BIOS release 5.16 BIOS, and from
• pCOWeb firmware version A1.5.0, and from
• pCOnet firmware version A485_A1.2.1
pCOWeb and pCOnet communication parameters can be configured.
The purpose is to configure the network (Ethernet for pCOWeb, RS485
for pCOnet) when the respective card is installed for the first time. The
remaining parameters (alarms, events, etc.) can be configured using the
usual tools, i.e. BACset or web interface (pCOWeb only). Configuration can
be done either when using the Modbus protocol or the CAREL protocol,
but only on the BMS1 serial port. The screens for configuring pCOWeb and
pCOnet can be opened by accessing the system screens and selecting
OTHER INFORMATION and then PCOWEB/NET Konfig. Then, select
“PCOWEB settings” to configure pCOWeb parameters or “PCONET settings”
to configure pCOnet parameters.
Function
String
DOWNLOAD the application
Download application
DOWNLOAD non-volatile memory
Download non volatile memory (.dev)
DOWNLOAD the entire contents of the pRack Copy pRack download
The result is the creation of files with the required extensions, which will
be placed in the respective directories as described in the paragraph “File
names”. When the operation is completed, the display shows a message
with the name of the directory created.
[FUNCTION]
Download application
The following screen will be displayed.
1. Press Enter to confirm.
Configuring pCOWeb
When you select “PCOWEB settings” the following screen will appear:
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
D H C P :
I P
Fig. 10.v
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
USB connector
from computer
BMS card
80
-
-
-
A D D R E S S
- - - . - - - .
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
ENG
After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters.
If the fields are not populated with the current parameters, check the
firmware version of pCOWeb and the protocol used by the BMS serial port.
The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective fields using
the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/DOWN
buttons. If the DHCP option is set to ON, the IP address and Netmask
fields cannot be changed. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the
parameters available, as listed in the following screens:
N e
G a
t m a
- - t e w
- - -
D N S
D N S
-
1
1
-
:
:
-
s k
. a y
. -
:
:
-
.
-
.
-
B A C n e
t
B A C n e
t
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
:
- p e
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I D
T y
-
10.5 Saving parameters between different
software versions
The configuration parameters can be saved and loaded after having
updated the software. The update requires the files relating to the new
version being loaded (files with the following extensions: .iup, .blx., .blb,
.grt, .dev) and the connection files (files with the following extensions: .2cf,
.2ct, .2cd) for the installed version and the new version.
The connection files must be copied to the ‘’2cf’’ directory under pRack
Manager, for example C:\Program Files\CAREL\pRackManager\2cf.
The update procedure including saving the parameters is as follows (for
details on the functions of the pRack Manager software see the online
manual):
1. Switch the unit off from the user terminal or supervisor or digital input
2. Connect the PC where pRack Manager is installed using the pLAN
serial (disconnect the terminal if necessary) and disconnect any BMS
connections
3. Start the pRack Manager software
4. In the ‘’Connection settings’’ panel, set Baud rate to ‘’Auto’’ and
SearchDevice to ‘’Auto (pLAN)’’ and select the COM port under
PortNumber (if necessary, use the Wizard to detect the correct COM)
5. In Commissioning/Settings select the .2cf file relating to the version
on pRack pR300, e.g. 1.0
6. Power down pRack pR300, power up again and wait for the controller
to come “On line”
7. In Device Configuration read all the variables and save them to an .txt
file (required)
8. Update the software version on pRack pR300, selecting from pRack
Load the following update files and selecting ‘’Update graphic
resources and ‘’Enable zipped upload’’:
• .iup (maximum 2 files)
• .blx
• .blb
• ClearAllx.dev, where x is the pLAN address of the board being
updated
9. Wait for the update procedure to end.
10. Power down, disconnect the PC and if necessary reconnect the
terminal
11. Power up again and run a quick start-up procedure (pre-configurations
or Wizard, confirming the default parameters)
12. Power down
13. Reconnect pRack Manager and power up again
14. In Commissioning/Settings select the .2cf file relating to the new
version now loaded on pRack
15. From Device Configuration, import the previously saved .txt file and
write all the variables
16. Power down, disconnect the PC and reconnect the terminal if
necessary
17. Power up again
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated by going to
the following screen and pressing ENTER.
P C O W E B
U p d a t e
C O N F I G
E N A B L E
p C O W e b ?
N O
While the parameters are being updated, the following message is
displayed:
P C O W E B
P l e a s e
e n d
o f
C O N F
w a i t
u p d a
I G
E N A B L E
f o r
t e
At the end, the screen shows:
P
U
R
a
C
p
e
p
O W E B
d a t e
b o o t
p l y
n
C O N F
c o m p
p C O W
s
e w
I G
E N A B L E
l e t e
e b
t o
e t t i n g
Configuring pCOnet
When you select “PCONET settings” the following screen will appear:
B A C n e
B A C n e
t
t
-
I D
b a
- -
:
- u d
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
At the end of the procedure, pRack pR300 will be programmed with the
updated software and the previously configured parameters.
-
Important: if using the BMS serial port to read/write variables, pRack
pR300 continues operating, and therefore software malfunctions may
occur. Consequently, use the RS485 serial port provided for the pLAN
connection when carrying out the software update operations described
above.
After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters. The
parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective fields using the
ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/DOWN buttons.
Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the parameters available, as listed
in the following screen:
B A C n e t
M A C :
M a x
M a s t e r s
M a x
F r a m e s :
:
-
-
-
-
Note: to update the software without maintaining the parameter
configuration, simply complete steps 1 to 4 and 8 to 10 in the previous
procedure. In this case, the unit will need to be reconfigured using the
complete start-up procedure.
-
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated following
the procedure described for configuring pCOWeb.
81
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
11. APPENDIX
A.1 System configurations available
The system configurations available are shown in the table:
System configurations:
Config. Description
number
Suction
lines
Condenser
lines
1
2
3
4
5
6
No suction line, one condenser line
No suction line, two condenser lines
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), no condenser line
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), no condenser line
0
0
1
1
1
2
1
2
0
1
1
0
7
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
2
1
8
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
on a separate board
2 suction lines (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines on the same board
2
1
2
2
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines
on separate boards
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
on suction line 1 board
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines
(one for each suction line board)
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines
on separate boards
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), no condenser line
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), 1 condenser line
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), 1 condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll
or piston compressors on line 2), 1 condenser line on suction line 1 board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll
or piston compressors on line 2), 1 condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll
or piston compressors on line 2), 2 condenser lines (one for each suction line board)
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll
or piston compressors on line 2), 2 condenser lines on separate boards
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines
(line 1 on separate board, line 2 on board in common with suction)
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
0
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Compressors Max. number of Units present in
L1/L2
compressors per pLAN (in add. to
line L1/L2
the terminal)
1
1
scroll, piston
12
1
scroll, piston
12
1
scroll, piston
12
1, 3
scroll, piston/
12/12
1
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 3
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 3
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 2
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 2 ,3
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 2
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
12/12
1, 2, 3, 4
scroll, piston
screw
2
1
screw
2
1
screw
2
1, 3
screw/scroll,
2/12
1, 2
piston
screw/scroll,
2/12
1, 2, 3
piston
screw/scroll,
2/12
1, 2
piston
screw/scroll,
2/12
1, 2, 3, 4
piston
scroll, piston/
2/12
1, 2, 3, 4
scroll, piston
Reference
diagram
a
a
a
a
b
c
c
e
f
g
h
d
h
i
a
a
b
h
d
h
i
l
Tab. A.a
The system configurations available refer to the following diagrams:
b. 1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors) and 1 condenser line on
a separate board:
a. up to 1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors) and up to 1
condenser line on just one pRack pR300 board:
3
2
C8
C7
J14
C8
C7
NC8
ID7
ID8
IDC1
NO8
C8
NC8
ID7
ID8
ID6
ID5
ID4
C4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID2
Y1
C4
ID1
VG0
C1
NO6
VG
NO3
GND
U5
J5
NO2
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
GND
+Vterm
B M S ca rd
J4
J3
IDC1
I/O
J12
J11 pLAN
J13
J14
J10
4
J25 BMS2
C7
C7
NO7
NO4
C1
pLAN
NO1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID2
J5
ID1
VG0
VG
GND
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J2
B M S c ard
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
G
+Vterm
GND
J2
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J24
C7
pR300
pR300
J1
1
J15
J1
FieldBus card
2
1
J26 FBus2
NO5
4
3
J26 FBus2
NC8
C7
C4
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO8
C4
4
J25 BMS2
J15
J14
J13
J10
J10
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
I/O
3
2
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S ca r d
I/O
Fig. A.b
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
82
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
J5
ID1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
Y2
Fig. A.a
ENG
c. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors) and
f.
up to 1 condenser line:
2 suction lines (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines on the
same board:
I/O
I/O
I/O
pR300
pR300
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.c
Fig. A.f
d. 2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line
1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 1 condenser line on a
separate board:
g. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines on separate boards:
4
J25 BMS2
C7
C8
J15
J14
J10
3
2
NC8
C7
C4
J13
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
J12
J11 pLAN
I/O
1
J26 FBus2
I/O
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
Y3
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
G
+Vterm
GND
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
J12
J11 pLAN
3
2
J25 BMS2
3
2
C8
C7
NC8
C7
J14
4
J26 FBus2
NO8
C4
J13
J10
1
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
NC8
C8
C7
C7
4
pR300
J15
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
C1
pLAN
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pLAN
pR300
pR300
B M S car d
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
J5
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
I/O
GND
G
J24
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
J1
ID5
ID4
Y4
Y3
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
B M S car d
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
GND
J24
+5 VREF
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
I/O
pR300
Fig. A.d
I/O
I/O
e. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1
condenser line on a separate board:
Fig. A.g
h. 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines (one for each suction line board)
4
3
2
NC8
C8
C7
C7
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
J11 pLAN
J15
1
I/O
I/O
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
3
2
2
C8
C7
C7
3
NC8
J15
J14
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
NO8
C4
J13
J10
1
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
C8
C7
C7
J15
J14
4
NC8
C4
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
NO4
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
NO2
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
B M S c ard
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
J5
ID1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
G
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
+Vterm
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J24
Y2
pR300
J1
GND
G0
G
J24
NO1
FieldBus card
J1
pR300
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.h
Fig. A.e
83
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
driver on pRack pR300 or external EVD EVO driver suitably integrated into
the system (Fieldbus communication over RS485).
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines on separate boards
3
2
C8
C7
C7
2
NC8
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
3
1
J26 FBus2
B M S c ard
ID7
ID8
IDC1
C8
NC8
ID8
ID6
ID5
NO8
Y4
Y3
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y2
ID1
Y1
C4
VG0
C4
NO6
VG
C1
GND
NO3
U5
NO2
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
NO5
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
IDC1
NC8
+Vterm
ID8
J24
GND
ID7
ID6
C8
ID5
NO8
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
J1
ID7
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
NO4
4
B M S c ard
J4
J3
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J15
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO3
C1
J15
NO2
C8
C7
C7
J14
4
NC8
C4
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pLAN
I/O
pLAN
NO1
I/O
NO4
i.
J13
J14
J10
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
J15
J12
J11 pLAN
C7
NO7
NO4
C7
3
2
1
J26 FBus2
B M S c ard
IDC1
ID6
ID5
Y4
Y3
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
FieldBus card
B M S c ard
J4
J3
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J15
J14
4
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
J13
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO1
C1
C7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pLAN
J12
J11 pLAN
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.i
j.
Fig. A.k
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines (line 1 on separate board, line 2 on common board
with suction)
C8
ID8
4
3
2
NC8
NO8
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
C4
NO6
NO5
J13
ID7
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
J12
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
J13
J14
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
NC8
C7
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NC8
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
C8
2
J26 FBus2
NO8
3
I/O
J15
ID8
4
C8
NO8
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
J13
ID7
J11 pLAN
NO5
C4
J12
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pLAN
NO1
ID6
ID5
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
GND
+Vterm
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
J5
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.l
Fig. A.j
Legenda:
A.2 Special configurations for subcritical CO2 systems,
ac. Description
Probe type
Text Outside temperature
NTC - HP
PDL1 Discharge pressure line 1
4-20 mA 0-18.2 barg
(medium temperature)
TDL1 Discharge temperature line 1 NTC - HF
(medium temperature)
PSL1 Suction pressure line 1
4-20 mA 0-7 barg
(medium temperature)
TSL1 Suction temperature line 1 NTC - HF
(medium temperature)
PE Heat exchanger evaporation Ratiometric -1-9.3
pressure
barg
TGS Heat exchanger superheated NTC – HF
gas temperature
PDL2 Discharge pressure line 2
4-20 mA 0-44.8 barg
(low temperature)
TDL2 Discharge temperature line 2 NTC – HF
(low temperature)
PSL2 Suction pressure line 2 (low 4-20 mA 0-44.8 barg
temperature)
TSL2 Suction temperature line 2 NTC - HF
(low temperature)
cascade and pumped systems
A.2.1 Cascade
The crucial aspect of this type of system is the cascade heat exchanger,
normally a plate heat exchanger, which controls the condensing stage of
the CO2 system. At times there are two heat exchangers, so as to improve
control at low loads and increase safety, and these are normally controlled by
EXV electronic expansion valves with stepper motors. In these applications,
as well as traditional control based on suction superheat, there is also
integration with the low temperature rack, directly when the rack controller
has a built-in driver, or via serial communication for external EVD EVO drivers.
Given the nature of the refrigerant, condensed liquid CO2 needs to be
monitored in order to ensure good performance and protection. Up to 2
heat exchangers can be connected via Fieldbus to the pRack controller, with
a driver for each heat exchanger. The drivers are connected to the board
that manages the low temperature suction line. Up to 6 control steps can
be configured for connecting other drivers controlled via digital input for
superheat control. There can be maximum two plate heat exchangers used
to condense CO2, and the expansion valve is managed using the built-in
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
84
Notes
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
Can be used as backup
for PE
To control suction
superheat (opt.)
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
To control suction
superheat (opt.)
ENG
The exchange of information between compressor rack and heat
exchanger allows traditional superheat control to be augmented by
factors that are vital for this type of system, such as variation in low
temperature compressor rack cooling capacity and the trend in CO2
condensing pressure. (pRack only sends the control parameters and the
cooling capacity to vary). The drivers connected via serial have advantages
over external configurations (via digital inputs) as the parameters are
easier to set (the driver screens can be accessed directly from the pRack
controller) and are more responsive when unit cooling capacity changes
considerably due to due peaks in demand. The drivers connected via serial
can use an estimated percentage of cooling capacity delivered by the
circuit to influence normal superheat control.
When the variation in capacity exceeds 10% or when control commences,
the driver pre-positions the valve to get closer to the optimum opening.
This operation ensures good control of condensing pressure on the low
temperature rack (S3 or A, configurable) when compressor on line 2
start. If the compressors on the low temperature rack are controlled by
inverter, capacity modulation will be much more linear and anticipation
of valve movements will have less influence (in terms of pre-positioning).
If using one or more single drivers, the condensing pressure probe can be
connected directly to the EVD EVO driver (S3), allowing just one pressure
probe to be used for condenser control and for the EVD EVO driver safety
procedure, which tends to open the valve when the CO2 condensing
temperature is too high. In this case, the CO2 condensing pressure probe
connected to pRack is optional.
This function can be used with the following configurations:
• pRack pR300 with built-in driver and just one heat exchanger
• pRack pR300 with single external EVD EVO driver
• pRack pR300 with 2 single external EVD EVO drivers
• pRack pR300 with 2 EVD EVO drivers, one of which built-in (only 1
exchanger) and 1 single external.
Note: carefully check the pressure control settings; for general
uniformity of the software, automatic set point selection is not featured for
the different types of control and different types of refrigerant. For example,
the suggested default set point for the low temperature compressors is 3.5
bars; in a cascade system (subcritical CO2) with R744 natural refrigerant, the
reference pressure values are around 11 bars. Together with the set point,
the probe limits and probe alarm thresholds will be correctly configured.
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (external driver for managing
the heat exchanger on the second line), single board;
EEV
FBUS
S1
S2
S3
I/O
EVD
evolution
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.m
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
the heat exchanger on the second line), single board;
Note: if serial communication between driver and pRack is interrupted,
the condensing pressure probe on the pRack, connected to the driver, will be
disconnected and the safety procedures featured on pRack will be activated
(alarm signal, use of the backup probe if configured, fan operation overridden
to a preset value). One DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used,
this will be managed as a single driver. The connection should be done on the
first valve too (EXV1- J27 if a built-in driver is used).
I/O
EEV
Details of the pRack configuration Wizard
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.n
After having selected this type of configuration, the software takes a few
seconds to pre-configure some settings relating to a typical cascade
system, i.e. the second condenser line; the Wizard will prompt whether to
control the CO2 condenser using the fans or the new EVS system:
85
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
the heat exchanger on the second line), double board;
EEV
EVD
FBUS evolution
C8
C7
C4
C7
2
NC8
NO7
NO6
C4
C1
C1
NO5
NO4
NO3
NO8
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
B M S c ard
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G
I/O
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J14
4
B M S car d
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+Vterm
+5 VREF
GND
J2
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pLAN
pR300
J1
NO1
J15
1
ID8
2
J26 FBus2
ID7
3
C8
C7
C7
4
NC8
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
NO6
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
C1
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
S1
S2
S3
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.o
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
Fig. A.r
the heat exchanger on the second line), double board;
pRack pR300 L1 connections
ac. Description
Probe type
Notes
Text Outside temperature
NTC - HP
PDL1 Condensing pressure line 1 4-20 mA 0-18.2barg
(medium temperature)
TDL1 Discharge temperature line 1 NTC - HF
To control discharge
(medium temperature)
temperature
PSL1 Suction pressure line 1
4-20 mA 0-10barg To control low pressure
(medium temperature)
alarm
TSL1 Suction temperature line 1 NTC - HF
To control suction
(medium temperature)
superheat
PREC CO2 receiver pressure
4-20 mA 0-10barg To control medium temperature compressors
EEV
J13
4
3
2
C8
NC8
NO8
J15
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
I/O
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
B M S car d
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
I/O
I/O
Tab. 11.b
pRack pR300T L2 connections
ac. Description
Probe type
TDL2 Discharge temperature line 2
NTC – HF
(low temperature)
PSL2 Suction pressure line 2 (low
4-20 mA 0-44.8barg
temperature)
TSL2 Suction temperature line 2 (low NTC - HF
temperature)
Fig. A.p
A2.2 Pumped
Less used than traditional cascade subcritical systems, this solution
limits the use of HFC refrigerants to the equipment rooms. The medium
temperature units are supplied with pumped liquid CO2, while the low
temperature units are fitted with expansion valves. The CO2 is cooled
by a dedicated chiller (NH3 or r134a) inside a tank, normally with a tube
bundle evaporator. In addition to traditional systems, these also include
management of the pumps that deliver the liquid CO2 to the medium
temperature evaporators, where it does not expand but rather is only
superheated and returns to the receiver in a semi-liquid state.
To control suction
superheat
Tab. 11.c
EVD EVO connections
ac.
PREC
PE
Description
Discharge pressure line 2 (low temperature)
Heat exchanger evaporation pressure
Probe type
4-20 mA 0-44.8barg
Ratiometric -1-9.3barg
TGS
Heat exchanger superheated gas temperature
NTC – HF
Tab. 11.d
Dettagli Wizard della configurazione pRack
Fig. A.q
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Notes
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
86
ENG
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (built-in driver for managing the heat exchanger
In this type of system, it is important to coordinate operation of the
medium temperature rack with tube bundle evaporator control, to
prevent low pressure problems. Pressure control inside the receiver is the
main task; given the quantity of refrigerant contained and consequently its
significant inertia, it is essential to activate the compressors based on the
receiver pressure, and medium temperature rack suction pressure will only
be monitored for safety, to prevent low pressure problems.
on the first line), 1 condenser line, single board;
I/O
EEV
Medium temperature circuit control
Medium temperature circuit control uses a pressure sensor installed on
the low temperature receiver; in order to exploit this sensor, pRack needs
to use an auxiliary control function available under COMPRESSORS®LINE
1®CONTROL, in screen Cab20
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.t
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (external driver for managing the heat exchanger
This screen is used to enable the function, set the required type of control
and the refrigerant in the auxiliary circuit.
An “auxiliary” control probe needs to be configured under INPUTS/
OUTPUTS®STATUS®ANALOG INPUTS in a free position on the controller.
The high and low auxiliary pressure/temperature probe alarms need to
be set under COMPRESSORS®LINE 1®ALARMS, checking the control
parameters.
on the first line), 1 condenser line, double board
EEV
EVD
FBUS evolution
C8
C7
C7
J14
4
3
2
NC8
C4
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
NO4
NO3
J13
J25 BMS2
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
B M S car d
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
J5
Y3
J4
J3
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
GND
J24
+5 VREF
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
Y3
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
GND
J24
+5 VREF
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.u
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (built-in driver for managing the heat exchanger
on the first line), 1 condenser line, double board
EEV
3
2
C8
C7
NC8
NO8
J15
J14
4
J25 BMS2
pR300
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S c ar d
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G
I/O
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
EEV
C7
J13
J10
pLAN
exchanger on the first line), 1 condenser line, single board;
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
C1
I/O
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (external driver for managing the heat
I/O
EVD
evolution
S1
S2
S3
FBUS
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pR300
Note: One DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used, this
will be managed as a single driver. The connection should be done on the first
valve too (EXV1- J27 if a built-in driver is used).
I/O
NO1
J15
1
ID8
2
J26 FBus2
ID7
3
C8
C7
C7
4
NC8
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
EVD EVO and EXV drivers
Management of the tube bundle evaporator is critical in these types of
applications, and the size of the evaporator, inertia of the load and proximity
to the compressors require very fine control, which needs to adapt
rapidly when the compressors are started or stopped, respond gradually
to changes of load, not flood the compressors, and protect against low
suction pressure alarms.
Functions on the EVD EVO driver, such as low superheat, low suction
temperature, low suction pressure and high CO2 condensing pressure
protection, therefore need to be correctly calibrated based on system
features (number and type of compressors, size of the evaporator and the
receiver, whether there are receivers on the suction line, system dynamics).
All these settings are found under OTHER FUNCTIONS®EVS on the board
that manages suction line 1.
NO1
S1
S2
S3
I/O
Fig. A.v
Note: don’t configure the second condensing line.
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.s
87
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
A.3 System configurations with more than
one pLAN board
A.3.2
Setting the address of the pRack pR300 board
The pLAN address of the pRack boards can be set from any pGD1 terminal,
using the following procedure:
1. set address 0 on the terminal (see the previous paragraph for details
on how to set this address);
2. power down the pRack pR300 board;
3. disconnect any pLAN connections to other boards from the pRack
pR300 board;
4. connect the terminal to the pRack pR300 board;
If the system configuration involves the connection of more than one
board in a pLAN, the addresses must be set correct before select a solution
of configuration. For the addresses to be assigned to the pRack pR300
boards see Appendix A.1. pRack pR300 can use two user terminals (as well
as a built-in terminal) with addresses 31 and 32. The default user terminal
address is 32, so only if a second terminal is required must the address
of this be set to 31, as described below. The address of the terminal is
also required when having to set the address of the pRack pR300 boards,
when multiple boards are connected to the pLAN. After having correctly
connected and configured the pLAN network of pRack pR300 boards, the
system can be configured as described in paragraph 4.1.
5. power up the pRack pR300 board, while pressing the
and
buttons on the terminal together. After a few seconds the pRack
pR300 board begins the start-up sequence and the display shows a
screen similar to the one below:
####################
selftest
please wait
####################
A.3.1 Setting the address of the terminal
The pRack pR300 user terminal is supplied with the default address
32, allowing the terminal to be used without requiring any additional
operations; nonetheless, in order to use an additional terminal or configure
the pLAN address of the boards, it needs to be changed according to the
following procedure:
1. power the terminal via the special telephone connector;
2. press the 3 buttons, , and
together for at least 5 seconds; the
terminal will display a screen similar to the one below, with the cursor
flashing in the top left corner:
6. when this screen is displayed, wait 10 seconds and then release the
buttons;
7. the pRack pR300 board interrupts the start-up sequence and shows a
configuration screen, similar to the one below:
pLAN address: 0
UP: increase
DOWN: decrease
ENTER: save & exit
Display address
setting.........:32
I/O Board address:01
3. press
once: the cursor will move to the “Display address setting”
field;
4. select the desired value using
and
, and confirm by pressing
again; if the value selected is different from the value saved, the
following screen will be displayed and the new value will be saved to
the display’s permanent memory.
Then set the pLAN address using the and buttons on the terminal.
8. Confirm the address by pressing
: the pRack pR300 board
completes the start-up sequence and uses the set address.
A3.3 Example of configuring a system with 2 suction
and condenser lines using the Wizard
Display address
changed
Below is a possible example of using the Wizard to configure a typical
system like the one shown in the figure, with 2 suction lines and 2
condenser lines on different boards:
Note: if the address field is set to 0, the “I/O Board address” field is no
longer displayed, as it has no meaning..
Display address
changed
C8
C7
C7
2
NC8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
C1
NO5
NO4
NO3
C4
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
B M S c ar d
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
I/O
+Vterm
J1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
B M S c ard
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J14
4
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
J13
J10
pR300
J1
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
pLAN
NO1
C8
C7
NC8
J15
1
NO8
2
J26 FBus2
ID8
3
I/O
ID7
• if the settings are not made correctly, the text and the images on the
I/O
Fig. A.t
The preliminary operations to be completed before configuration are as follows:
1. with the boards not connected in the pLAN, power up the second
pRack board and set the pLAN address to 2 (for details see Appendix A.2)
2. power down and connect the two boards in the pLAN, plus any
terminals, as described in paragraph 3.7
3. power up the boards and wait for the Wizard selection screen to be
displayed.
If the terminal detects inactivity of the entire pLAN network, that is, it does
not receive any messages from the network for 10 seconds consecutively,
it clears the display and shows the following message:
NO LINK
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
C7
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
J13
J10
display will be displayed incorrectly and out of order.
• if during this operation the terminal detects inactivity of the pRack
board whose output is being displayed, the display is cleared and a
message similar to the one below is shown.
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
Important
88
ENG
Then select the type of system as SUCTION & CONDENSER:
After having answered the questions for the configuration of the second
suction line, the software then asks if there is a pLAN board dedicated to
condenser line 1. In the case shown in the example, answer NO.
Set the type of compressors and control for suction line 1, answering the
questions prompted by the pRack pR300 software, e.g.:
After having configured condenser line 1, the software asks if condenser
line 2 is used; answer YES:
After having configured the second condenser line, the software offers the
option to automatically configure the I/Os (choosing YES), as described
in par. 4.1.4. If choosing NO, each individual I/O needs to be configured
manually at the end of the wizard. In addition, the software asks the user
whether or not to display a summary of the settings made:
If the settings are correct, the set values can be installed:
After having configured suction line 1, a prompt will be shown to configure
another suction line, obviously the answer is YES:
After waiting a few seconds, the unit can be started.
To the next question, which prompts if there is a pRack board dedicated
to the second line, answer YES; in this way, the pRack pR300 software
prepares to configure the board with address 2 in the pLAN:
Note: after having configured pRack pR300, the device needs to be
switched off and on again to permanently save the new data.
89
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
A.4 Alarm table
Code
ALA01
ALA02
ALA03
ALA04
ALA05
ALA06
ALA07
ALA08
ALA09
ALA10
ALA11
ALA12
ALA13
ALA14
ALA15
ALA16
ALA17
ALA18
ALA19
ALA20
ALA21
ALA22
ALA23
ALA24
ALA25
ALA26
ALA27
ALA28
ALA29
ALA30
ALA31
ALA32
ALA33
ALA34
ALA35
ALA36
ALA39
ALA40
ALA41
ALA42
ALB01
ALB02
ALB03
ALB04
ALB05
ALB06
ALB07
ALB08
ALB09
ALB10
ALB11
Description
Discharge temperature probe malfunction
Condensing pressure probe malfunction
Outside temperature probe malfunction
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB4
Suction pressure probe malfunction
Suction temperature probe malfunction
Room temperature probe malfunction
Condensing pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Suction temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction
Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Common oil temperature probe malfunction
Common oil temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1 to 6
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1 to 6, line 2
Oil temperature probe malfunction compressors 1 to 6, line 1
Oil temperature probe malfunction compressor 1, line 2
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
Low condensing pressure from probe
High condensing pressure from probe
Liquid level
Common oil differential
Common fan circuit breaker
Low suction pressure from pressure switch, line 2
High condensing pressure from pressure switch, line 2
Low condensing pressure from probe, line 2
High condensing pressure from probe, line 2
Reset
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Semiautomatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Semiautomatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Delay
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Alarm relay
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R2
R2
R1
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R1
R1
R1
R2
R2
Settable
R1
R1
R1
R1
ALB12
ALB13
ALB14
ALB15
ALB16
ALB17
ALB18
ALB21
ALB22
ALC01
ALC02
ALC03
ALC04
ALC05
ALC06
ALC07
ALC08
ALC09
ALC10
ALC11
ALC12
ALC13
ALC14
ALC15
ALC16
ALC17
ALC18
ALC19
ALC20
ALC21
ALC22
ALC23
ALC24
ALC25
ALC26
ALC27
ALC28
ALC29
ALC30
ALC31
ALC32
ALC33
ALC34
ALC35
Liquid level, line 2
Common oil differential, line 2
Common fan circuit breaker, line 2
High suction pressure from probe
Low suction pressure from probe
High suction pressure from probe, line 2
Low suction pressure from probe, line 2
Shutdown to prevent high pressure
Shutdown to prevent high pressure, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 1
Alarm 2, compressor 1
Alarm 3, compressor 1
Alarm 4, compressor 1
Alarm 5, compressor 1
Alarm 6, compressor 1
Alarm 7, compressor 1
Alarm 1, compressor 2
Alarm 2, compressor 2
Alarm 3, compressor 2
Alarm 4, compressor 2
Alarm 5, compressor 2
Alarm 6, compressor 2
Alarm 7, compressor 2
Alarm 1, compressor 3
Alarm 2, compressor 3
Alarm 3, compressor 3
Alarm 4, compressor 3
Alarm 5, compressor 3
Alarm 6, compressor 3
Alarm 7, compressor 3
Alarm 1, compressor 4
Alarm 2, compressor 4
Alarm 3, compressor 4
Alarm 4, compressor 4
Alarm 5, compressor 4
Alarm 6, compressor 4
Alarm 7, compressor 4
Alarm 1, compressor 5
Alarm 2, compressor 5
Alarm 3, compressor 5
Alarm 4, compressor 5
Alarm 6, compressor 5
Alarm 7, compressor 5
Alarm 7, compressor 5
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
Settable
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
90
Action
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Force fans to 0%
Force fans to 100% and compressor stop
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Force fans to 0%, line 2
Force fans to 100% and stop compressor, line 2
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
ENG
Code
ALC36
ALC37
ALC38
ALC39
ALC40
ALC41
ALC42
ALC43
ALC44
ALC45
ALC46
ALC47
ALC48
ALC49
ALC50
ALC51
ALC52
ALC53
ALC54
ALC55
ALC56
ALC57
ALC58
ALC59
ALC60
ALC61
ALC62
ALC63
ALC64
ALC65
ALC66
ALC67
ALC68
ALC69
ALC70
ALC71
ALC72
ALC73
ALC74
ALC75
ALC76
ALC77
ALC78
ALC79
ALC80
ALC81
ALC82
ALC83
ALC84
ALC85
ALC86
ALC87
ALC88
ALC89
ALC90
ALC91
ALC92
ALC93
ALC94
ALC95
ALC96
ALC97
ALC98
ALC99
ALCaa
ALCab
ALCac
ALCad
ALCae
ALCaf
ALCag
ALCah
ALCai
ALCal
ALCam
AlCan
ALCao
AlCap
ALF01
ALF02
ALG01
ALG02
ALG11
ALG12
ALG13
ALG14
ALG15
ALG16
ALG17
ALG18
ALG19
ALG20
ALG21
ALG22
ALG23
ALG24
ALG25
ALG26
Description
Alarm 1, compressor 6
Alarm 2, compressor 6
Alarm 3, compressor 6
Alarm 4, compressor 6
Alarm 5, compressor 6
Alarm 6, compressor 6
Alarm 7, compressor 6
Alarm 1, compressor 7
Alarm 2, compressor 7
Alarm 1, compressor 8
Alarm 2, compressor 8
Alarm 1, compressor 9
Alarm 2, compressor 9
Alarm 1, compressor 10
Alarm 1, compressor 11
Alarm 1, compressor 12
Alarm 1, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 7, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 7, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 8, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 8, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 9, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 9, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 10, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 11, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 12, line 2
High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™
High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™
High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™
High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High discharge temperature compressors 1 to 6
High discharge temperature compressors 1 to 6, line 2
Compressor envelope
High compressor oil temperature, line 1
High compressor oil temperature, line 2
Fan circuit breaker
Fan circuit breaker, line 2
Clock error
Extended memory error
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB1
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB2
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB3
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB4
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB1
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB2
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB3
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB4
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4
Reset
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
91
Delay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
60s
60s
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Alarm relay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Action
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 7
Shutdown compressor 7
Shutdown compressor 8
Shutdown compressor 8
Shutdown compressor 9
Shutdown compressor 9
Shutdown compressor 10
Shutdown compressor 11
Shutdown compressor 12
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 7, line 2
Shutdown compressor 7, line 2
Shutdown compressor 8, line 2
Shutdown compressor 8, line 2
Shutdown compressor 9, line 2
Shutdown compressor 9, line 2
Shutdown compressor 10, line 2
Shutdown compressor 11, line 2
Shutdown compressor 12, line 2
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown fans
Shutdown fans
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
-
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Code
ALG27
ALG28
ALG29
ALG30
ALG31
ALG32
ALG33
ALG34
ALH01
ALH02
ALO02
ALT01
ALT02
ALT03
ALT04
ALU01
ALU02
ALW01
Description
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
ChillBooster fault
ChillBooster fault, line 2
pLAN malfunction
Compressor maintenance request
Compressor maintenance request, line 2
ChillBooster maintenance request
ChillBooster maintenance request, line 2
Configuration not allowed
Control probes missing
High pressure prevent warning
Reset
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
manual
manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Delay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
60s
0s
0s
Not featured
Not featured
Settable
Alarm relay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
R1
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
ALW02
High pressure prevent warning, line 2
Automatic
Settable
Not featured
ALW03
ALW04
ALW05
ALW06
ALW07
ALW08
ALW09
ALW10
ALW11
ALW12
ALW13
ALE01
ALE01
ALE01
ALE02
ALE02
ALE02
ALE03
ALE03
ALE03
ALE04
ALE04
ALE04
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE11
ALE12
ALE13
ALE14
Compressor inverter warning
Compressor inverter warning, line 2
Fan inverter warning
Fan inverter warning, line 2
Envelope warning: refrigerant not compatible with compressor series
Envelope warning: custom envelope not configured
Envelope warning: suction or condensing probes not configured
Low superheat warning
Low superheat warning, line 2
Warning, ChillBooster operating without outside sensor
Warning, ChillBooster operating without outside sensor, line 2
EEV motor error on Driver 1
High condensing temperature on Driver 1
Low suction temperature on Driver 1
Low superheat on Driver 1
Low operating pressure on Driver 1
Maximum operating pressure on Driver 2
EEV motor error on Driver 2
High condensing temperature on Driver 2
Low suction temperature on Driver 2
Low superheat on Driver 2
Low operating pressure on Driver 2
Maximum operating pressure on Driver 2
EEPROM error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S1 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S2 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S3 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S4 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Offline error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Battery error on Driver 1 in PLB1
EEPROM error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S1 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S2 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S3 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S4 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Offline error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Battery error on Driver 1 in PLB3
EEPROM error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S1 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S2 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S3 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S4 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Offline error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Battery error on Driver 2 in PLB1
EEPROM error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S1 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S2 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S3 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S4 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Offline error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Battery error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Parameter transmission error on Driver 1
Parameter transmission error on Driver 2
FW compatibility error on Driver 1
FW compatibility error on Driver 2
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
0s
0s
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
0
0
0
0
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
Config.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
92
Action
Disable ChillBooster
Disable ChillBooster
Shutdown unit
Shutdown unit
Shutdown unit
Shutdown compressor, except minimum load stage
Shutdown compressor line 2, except
minimum load stage
Tab. A.e
ENG
A.5 I/O Table
Other functions
Condenser
Line 1
Suction
Digital inputs
Mask Index
Ac05, Baack
Baa56, Caaah
Baada, Caa14
Baa02, Caa01
Baa03, Caa02
Baa04, Caa03
Baa05, Caa04
Baa06, Caa05
Baa07, Caa06
Baa08. Caa07
Baa09, Caa15
Baa10, Caa16
Baa11, Caa17
Baa12, Caa18
Baa13, Caa19
Baa14, Caa20
Baa15, Caa21
Baa17, Caa28
Baa18, Caa29
Baa19, Caa30
Baa20, Caa31
Baa21, Caa32
Baa22, Caa33
Baa23, Caa34
Baa24, Caa40
Baa25, Caa41
Baa26, Caa42
Baa27, Caa43
Baa28, Caa44
Baa29, Caa45
Baa30, Caa46
Baa32, Caa53
Baa33, Caa54
Baa34, Caa55
Baa35, Caa56
Baa36, Caa57
Baa37, Caa58
Baa38, Caa59
Baa39, Caa65
Baa40, Caa66
Baa41, Caa67
Baa42, Caa68
Baa43, Caa69
Baa44, Caa70
Baa45, Caa71
Baa47, Caa78
Baa48, Caa79
Baa49, Caa84
Baa50, Caa85
Baa51, Caa90
Baa52, Caa91
Baa53, Caa95
Baa54, Caa99
Baa55, Caaad
Baa58, Caaaj
Baa59, Caaak
Baadc
Baa57
Baaau, Daa01
Baaav, Daa02
Baaaw, Daa03
Baaax, Daa04
Baaay, Daa05
Baaaz, Daa06
Baaba, Daa07
Baabb, Daa08
Baabc, Daa09
Baabd, Daa10
Baabe, Daa11
Baabf, Daa12
Baabg, Daa13
Baabh, Daa14
Baabi, Daa15
Baabj, Daa16
Baabk, Daa17
Baabl
Baacx, Egaa01
Baacz
Baacl, Caa00, Daa41
Daa43
Daa44
Daa45
Eeaa02
Description
Unit ON/OFF line 1
Common low pressure switch line 1
Compressor inverter warning
Alarm 1 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 7 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 7 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 8 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 8 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 9 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 9 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 10 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 11 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 12 line 1
Common oil alarm line 1
Liquid level alarm line 1
Fan inverter warning line 1
Common high pressure switch line 1
Fan overload 1 line 1
Fan overload 2 line 1
Fan overload 3 line 1
Fan overload 4 line 1
Fan overload 5 line 1
Fan overload 6 line 1
Fan overload 7 line 1
Fan overload 8 line 1
Fan overload 9 line 1
Fan overload 10 line 1
Fan overload 11 line 1
Fan overload 12 line 1
Fan overload 13 line 1
Fan overload 14 line 1
Fan overload 15 line 1
Fan overload 16 line 1
Common fan overload line 1
Heat recovery line 1
ChillBooster fault line 1
Enable floating condensing line 1
Set point compensation line 1
Anti noise line 1
Split condenser line 1
Enable floating condensing line 1
Heat recovery activation line 1
Chan.
93
Logic
Notes
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Comuni
Other functions
Condenser
Line 2
Suction
ENG
Mask Index
Ac08, Baacy
Baaap, Cbaah
Baadb, Cba14
Baaar, Cbaaj
Baa61, Cba01
Baa62, Cba02
Baa63, Cba03
Baa64, Cba04
Baa65, Cba05
Baa66, Cba06
Baa67, Cba07
Baa68, Cba15
Baa69, Cba16
Baa70, Cba17
Baa71, Cba18
Baa72, Cba19
Baa73, Cba20
Baa74, Cba21
Baa76, Cba28
Baa77, Cba29
Baa78, Cba30
Baa79, Cba31
Baa80, Cba32
Baa81, Cba33
Baa82, Cba34
Baa83, Cba40
Baa84, Cba41
Baa85, Cba42
Baa86, Cba43
Baa87, Cba44
Baa88, Cba45
Baa89, Cba46
Baa91, Cba53
Baa92, Cba54
Baa93, Cba55
Baa94, Cba56
Baa95, Cba57
Baa96, Cba58
Baa97, Cba59
Baa98, Cba65
Baa99, cba66
Baaaa, Cba67
Baaab, Cba68
Baaac, Cba69
Baaad, Cba70
Baaae, Cba71
Baaag, Cba78
Baaah, Cba79
Baaai, Cba84
Baaaj, Cba85
Baaak, Cba90
Baaal, Cba91
Baaam, Cba95
Baaan, Cba99
Baaao, Cbaad
Baaas, Cbaak
Baadd
Baaaq
Baabn, Dba01
Baabo, Dba02
Baabp, Dba03
Baabq, Dba04
Baabr, Dba05
Baabs, Dba06
Baabt, Dba07
Baabu, Dba08
Baabv, Dba09
Baabw, Dba10
Baabx, Dba11
Baaby, Dba12
Baabz, Dba13
Baaca, Dba14
Baacb, Dba15
Baacc, Dba16
Baacd, Dba17
Baace
Egba01
Baade
Baacm, Cbd06, Dbd08
Dba43
Dba44
Dba45
Eeba02
Baacf, Efe16
Baacg, Efe17
Baach, Efe18
Baaci, Efe19
Baacj, Efe20
Baacn
Baadf
Baadg
Description
Unit ON/OFF line 2
Common low pressure switch line 2
Compressor inverter warning line 2
Common oil alarm line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 7 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 7 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 8 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 8 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 9 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 9 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 10 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 11 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 12 line 2
Liquid level alarm line 2
Fan inverter warning line 2
Common high pressure switch line 2
Fan overload 1 line 2
Fan overload 2 line 2
Fan overload 3 line 2
Fan overload 4 line 2
Fan overload 5 line 2
Fan overload 6 line 2
Fan overload 7 line 2
Fan overload 8 line 2
Fan overload 9 line 2
Fan overload 10 line 2
Fan overload 11 line 2
Fan overload 12 line 2
Fan overload 13 line 2
Fan overload 14 line 2
Fan overload 15 line 2
Fan overload 16 line 2
Common fan overload line 2
Heat recovery line 2
ChillBooster fault line 2
Enable floating condensing line 2
Set point compensation line 2
Anti noise line 2
Split condenser line 2
Enable floating condensing line 2
Heat recovery activation line 2
Generic DI F
Generic DI G
Generic DI H
Generic DI I
Generic DI J
pRack automatic or manual operation
pLoads digital input 1
pLoads digital input 2
Chan.
Tab. A.f
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
94
Logic
Notes
ENG
Digital outputs
Mask Index
Bac02, Caa08
Bac03, Caa09
Bac04, Caa10
Bac05, Caa11
Bac07, Caa12
Bac08, Caa22
Bac10, Caa23
Bac11, Caa24
Bac12, Caa25
Bac13, Caa26
Bac15, Caa35
Bac16, Caa36
Bac17, Caa37
Bac18, Caa38
Bac20, Caa39
Bac21, Caa47
Suction
Line 1
Bac22, Caa48
Bac23, Caa49
Bac24, Caa50
Bac26, Caa51
Bac28, Caa60
Bac29, Caa61
Bac30, Caa62
Bac31, Caa63
Bac33, Caa64
Bac34, Caa72
Bac35, Caa73
Bac36, Caa74
Bac37, Caa75
Bac39, Caa76
Bac41, Caa80
Bac42, Caa81
Bac43, Caa82
Bac45, Caa83
Bac46, Caa86
Bac47, Caa87
Bac48, Caa88
Bac50, Caa89
Bac51, Caa92
Bac52, Caa93
Bac55, Caa94
Bac56, Caa96
Bac57, Caa97
Bac60, Caa98
Bac61, Caaaa
Condenser
Line 1
Bac62, Caaab
Bac65, Caaac
Bac66, Caaae
Bac67, Caaaf
Bac70, Caaag
Ebaa01
Bacbt, Daa21
Bacbu, Daa22
Bacbv, Daa23
Bacbw, Daa24
Bacbx, Daa25
Bacby, Daa26
Bacbz, Daa27
Bacca, Daa28
Baccb, Daa29
Baccc, Daa30
Baccd, Daa31
Bacce, Daa32
Baccf, Daa33
Baccg, Daa34
Bacch, Daa35
Bacci, Daa36
Description
Line relay compressor 1 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 1 line 1
Delta relay compressor 1 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 1
Line relay compressor 2 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 2 line 1
Delta relay compressor 2 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 2 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 1
Line relay compressor 3 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 3 line 1
Delta relay compressor 3 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 3 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 3 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 3 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 3 line 1
Line relay compressor 4 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 4 line 1
Delta relay compressor 4 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 4 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 4 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 4 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 4 line 1
Line relay compressor 5 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 5 line 1
Delta relay compressor 5 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 5 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 5 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 5 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 5 line 1
Line relay, compressor 6 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay, compressor 6 line 1
Delta relay, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 1, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 2, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 3, compressor 6 line 1
Balancing valve, compressor 6 line 1
Line relay compressor 7 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 7 line 1
Delta relay compressor 7 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 7 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 7 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 7 line 1
Line relay compressor 8 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 8 line 1
Delta relay compressor 8 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 8 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 8 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 8 line 1
Line relay compressor 9 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 9 line 1
Delta relay compressor 9 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 9 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 9 line 1
Line relay compressor 10 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 10 line 1
Delta relay compressor 10 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 10 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 10 line 1
Relay line compressor 11 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 11 line 1
Delta relay compressor 11 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 11 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 11 line 1
Relay line compressor 12 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 12 line 1
Delta relay compressor 12 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 12 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 12 line 1
Subcooling valve line 1
Fan 1 line 1
Fan 2 line 1
Fan 3 line 1
Fan 4 line 1
Fan 5 line 1
Fan 6 line 1
Fan 7 line 1
Fan 8 line 1
Fan 9 line 1
Fan 10 line 1
Fan 11 line 1
Fan 12 line 1
Fan 13 line 1
Fan 14 line 1
Fan 15 line 1
Fan 16 line 1
Chan.
95
Logic
Notes
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Other functions
Line 1
ENG
Mask Index
Bacck, Eeaa03
Baccl, Egaa02
Bacdp, Eaaa11
Bacdq, Eaaa12
Bacdr, Eaaa13
Bacdv, Ecaa07, Edaa07
Bacdw, Ecaa08, Edaa08
Bacdx, Ecaa09, Edaa09
Bacdy, Ecaa10, Edaa10
Bacdz, Ecaa11, Edaa11
Bacea, Ecaa12, Edaa12
Bac01
Bacei
Bacek, Ebaa01
Eaaa15
Eaaa16
Eaaa18
Eaaa19
Eaaa40
Eaaa41
Eaaa42
Eaaa43
Eaaa44
Eaaa45
Bac73, Cba08
Bac74, Cba09
Bac75, Cba10
Bac76, Cba11
Bac78, Cba12
Bac79, Cba22
Suction
Line 2
Bac80, Cba23
Bac81, Cba24
Bac82, Cba25
Bac84, Cba26
Bac86, Cba35
Bac87, Cba36
Bac88, Cba37
Bac89, Cba38
Bac91, Cba39
Bac92, Cba47
Bac94, Cba48
Bac95, Cba49
Bac96, Cba50
Bac98, Cba51
Bacaa, Cba60
Bacab, Cba61
Bacac, Cba62
Bacad, Cba63
Bacaf, Cba64
Ebba01
Bacag, Cba72
Bacah, Cba73
Bacai, Cba74
Bacaj, Cba75
Bacal, Cba76
Bacan, Cba80
Suction
Line 2
Bacao, Cba81
Bacap, Cba82
Bacar, Cba83
Bacas Cba86
Bacat, Cba87
Bacau, Cba88
Bacaw, Cba89
Bacax, Cba92
Bacay, Cba93
Bacbb, Cba94
Bacbc, Cba96
Bacbd, Cba97
Bacbg, Cba98
Bacbh, Cbaaa
Bacbi, Cbaab
Bacbl, Cbaac
Bacbm, Cbaae
Bacbn, Cbaaf
Bacbq, Cbaag
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
Description
Heat recovery pump line 1
ChillBooster line 1
Oil pump 1 line 1
Oil pump 2 line 1
Oil fan line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 1 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 2 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 3 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 4 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 5 line 1
Liquid injection valve/ Economizer, compressor 6 line 1
Anti liquid return line 1
Force from BMS line 1
Subcooling line 1
Oil cooling pump screw compressor 1 line 1
Oil cooling fan screw compressor 1 line 1
Oil cooling pump screw compressor 2 line 1
Oil cooling fan screw compressor 2 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 1 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 1
Oil level valve, compressor 6 line 1
Relay line compressor 1 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 1 line 2
Delta relay compressor 1 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 2
Line relay compressor 2 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 2 line 2
Delta relay compressor 2 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 2 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 2
Line relay compressor 3 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 3 line 2
Delta relay compressor 3 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 3 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 3 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 3 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 3 line 2
Line relay compressor 4 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 4 line 2
Delta relay compressor 4 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 4 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 4 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 4 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 4 line 2
Line relay compressor 5 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 5 line 2
Delta relay compressor 5 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 5 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 5 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 5 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 5 line 2
Subcooling valve line 2
Line relay, compressor 6 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay, compressor 6 line 2
Delta relay, compressor 6 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 6 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 6 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 6 line 2
Balancing valve, compressor 6 line 2
Line relay compressor 7 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 7 line 2
Delta relay compressor 7 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 7 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 7 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 7 line 2
Line relay compressor 8 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 8 line 2
Delta relay compressor 8 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 8 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 8 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 8 line 2
Line relay compressor 9 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 9 line 2
Delta relay compressor 9 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 9 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 9 line 2
Line relay compressor 10 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 10 line 2
Delta relay compressor 10 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 10 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 10 line 2
Line relay compressor 11 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 11 line 2
Delta relay compressor 11 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 11 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 11 line 2
Line relay compressor 12 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 12 line 2
Delta relay compressor 12 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 12 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 12 line 2
96
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Common
Other functions
Line 2
Condenser
ENG
Mask Index
Baccn, Dba20
Bacco, Dba21
Baccp, Dba22
Baccq, Dba23
Baccr, Dba24
Baccs, Dba25
Bacct, Dba26
Baccu, Dba27
Baccv, Dba28
Baccw, Dba29
Baccx, Dba30
Baccy, Dba31
Baccz, Dba32
Bacda, Dba33
Bacdb, Dba34
Bacdc, Dba35
Bacdd, Dba36
Bacde, Eeba03
Bacdf, Egba02
Bacds, Eaba10
Bacdt, Eaba11
Bacdu, Eaba12
Baceb, Ecba07, Edba07
Bacec, Ebca08, Edba08
Baced, Ecba09, Edba09
Bacee, Ecba10, Edba10
Bacef, Ecba11, Edba11
Baceg, Ecba12, Edba12
Bac72
Bacej
Bacel, Ebbb01
Eaba40
Eaba41
Eaba42
Eaba43
Eaba44
Eaba45
Bacdg, Efe21
Bacdh, Efe22
Bacdi, Efe23
Bacdj, Efe24
Bacdk, Efe25
Bacdl
Bacdm, Efe26
Bacdn, Efe27
Bacdo, Efe28
Baceh
Bacem
Bacen
Description
Fan1 line 2
Fan 2 line 2
Fan 3 line 2
Fan 4 line 2
Fan 5 line 2
Fan 6 line 2
Fan 7 line 2
Fan 8 line 2
Fan 9 line 2
Fan 10 line 2
Fan 11 line 2
Fan 12 line 2
Fan 13 line 2
Fan 14 line 2
Fan 15 line 2
Fan 16 line 2
Fan inverter line 2
Heat recovery pump line 2
ChillBooster line 2
Oil pump 1 line 2
Oil pump 2 line 2
Oil fan line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 1 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 2 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 3 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 4 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 5 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 6 line 2
Anti liquid return line 2
Force from BMS line 2
Subcooling line 2
Oil level valve compressor 1 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 2
Oil level valve, compressor 6 line 2
Generic stage function 1
Generic stage function 2
Generic stage function 3
Generic stage function 4
Generic stage function 5
Active alarms
Generic alarm function 1
Generic alarm function 2
Generic scheduling function
Sign of life
Minor alarm
Serious alarm
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Tab. A.g
97
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
ENG
Common
Other
Line 2
C.
Suct.
Other functions
C.
Suct.
Analogue inputs
Mask Index
Bab01, Caaal
Bab02, Caaam
Bab03, Caaao
Bab04, Daa39
Bab09, Daa40
Bab11, Daa41
Bab12
Bab13, Eeaa05
Bab15, Daa20
Bab16
Bab17, Eaaa04
Bab29, Ecaa01, Edaa01
Bab30, Ecaa02 Edaa02
Bab31, Ecaa03, Edaa03
Bab32, Ecaa04, Edaa04
Bab33, Ecaa05, Edaa05
Bab34, Ecaa06, Edaa06
Bab41, Eaaa05
Bab42, Eaaa06
Bab43, Eaaa07
Bab44, Eaaa08
Bab45, Eaaa09
Bab46, Eaaa10
Bab05, Caal
Bab06, Caaam
Bab07, Caaao
Bab08, Dba39
Bab10, Dba40
Bab48, Dba38
Bab49
Bab14, Eeba05
Bab18, Eaba04
Bab35, Ecba01, Edba01
Bab36, Ecba02, Edba02
Bab37, Ecba03, Edba03
Bab38, Ecba04, Edba04
Bab39, Ecba05, Edba05
Bab40, Ecba06, Edba06
Bab47, Eaba05
Bab19, Efe06
Bab20, Efe07
Bab21, Efe08
Bab22, Efe09
Bab23, Efe10
Bab24, Efe11
Bab25, Efe12
Bab26, Efe13
Bab27, Efe14
Bab28, Efe15
Bab58
Description
Return pressure probe line 1
Return backup pressure probe line 1
Return temperature probe line 1
Condensing pressure probe line 1
Backup condensing pressure probe line 1
Discharge temperature probe line 1
Liquid temperature probe line 1
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe line 1
Outside temperature probe line 1
Room temperature probe line 1
Oil temperature probe line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 1
Discharge temperature probe, compressor 6 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 1
Return pressure probe line 2
Return backup pressure probe line 2
Return temperature probe line 2
Condensing pressure probe line 2
Backup condensing pressure probe line 2
Discharge temperature probe line 2
Liquid temperature probe line 2
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe line 2
Oil temperature probe line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 2
Discharge temperature probe, compressor 6 line 2
Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 2
Generic active probe A
Generic passive probe A
Generic active probe B
Generic passive probe B
Generic active probe C
Generic passive probe C
Generic active probe D
Generic passive probe D
Generic active probe E
Generic passive probe E
Energy meter
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Tab. A.h
Line 2
Line 1
Analogue outputs
Mask Index
Bad01, Caa14
Bad02, Eaaa14
Bad07, Daa38
Bad08, Eeaa04
Bad12, Efe29
Eaaa17
Bad04
Bad05, Eaba13
Bad10, Dba37
Bad11, Eeba04
Bad13, Efe30
Eaaa20
Description
Compressor inverter output line 1
Oil pump output line 1
Fan inverter output line 1
Heat recovery valve output line 1
Generic modulating output 1
Oil cooling pump output screw compressor 1
Compressor inverter output line 2
Oil pump output line 2
Fan inverter output line 2
Heat recovery valve output line 2
Generic modulating output 2
Oil cooling pump output screw compressor 2
Tab. A.i
CAREL reserves the right to modify or change its products without prior
warning.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
98
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.5 - 17.02.2020
CAREL INDUSTRIES - Headquarters
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy)
Tel. (+39) 049.9716611 - Fax (+39) 049.9716600
e-mail: [email protected] - www.carel.com
">